JP2019088884A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of determining a degree of expectation toward winning in performance units under one variation performance while suppressing loss of interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a plurality of notice performances indicating degrees of expectation toward a jackpot under a variation performance, a rank of a degree of expectation indicated by each of the notice performances is separately determined. In this case, when a degree of expectation toward a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice performance under a variation performance, in a next notice performance (a subsequent notice performance), patterns which correspond to ranks having lower degrees of expectation toward a jackpot than that of the one rank are not selected in determination of the rank of the degree of expectation shown in the next notice performance. Thus, a decrease in degree of expectation toward a jackpot after a high degree of expectation toward a jackpot is shown can be prevented in the plurality of notice performances executed during one variation performance, thus suppressing the loss of player's interest.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, fluctuation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on the predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbol is predetermined at the predetermined stop position. In the case where there is a hit.

  There is also a gaming machine which not only displays the fluctuation effect on the display means, but also executes an effect showing the player's expected degree of winning during the fluctuation effect. In such a gaming machine, there are many cases in which an effect indicating an expected degree of winning to the player is executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect. In this way, even if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is performed, the player is expected to be a hit without being bored by executing the effect indicating the expected degree to the player a plurality of times during the fluctuation effect. It is possible to play the game while enhancing the feeling.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-312981

  In the conventional gaming machine, in the case of performing the effect of showing the expectation of winning to the player a plurality of times during the fluctuation effect, the pattern of the effect to be executed a plurality of times is determined collectively at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, there can be considered a method of determining the degree of anticipation to be a hit in each effect unit.

  However, in the case of determining the degree of expectation to be a hit in each of the effect units during one variation production, there may be a case where a presentation with a low degree of expectation is performed after the effect showing a high degree of expectation is once performed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the possibility of being hit may actually be low even though the player's expectation of being hit once is increased, and the player is disappointed with the interest in the game. There is a risk of being turned away.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the attraction of games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, and movement of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The main control means having selection means for selecting the type of the change effect which is the dynamic display, and the change effect based on the type of the change effect selected by the selection means according to the instruction from the main control means And sub-control means having a fluctuation-effect executing means to be executed, and giving predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation-effect executing means. The sub-control means indicates an expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation rendition during execution of one of the fluctuation rendition by the fluctuation rendition executing means. A suggestion effect execution means for executing a plurality of predetermined suggestion effects according to the present invention, and a selection means for selecting, for each of the predetermined suggestion effects, an expected degree type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect performed by the suggestion effect execution means; The predetermined suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in different display types when displaying the display modes, The selection means is capable of selecting all kinds of the display types for the first predetermined suggestion effect in the variation effect, and the counter is updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined update timing. Defining means for storing boundary values in a case where the predetermined range to be updated is associated with a plurality of display types which can be displayed by the predetermined suggestion effect, the boundary values, and the counter Judgment means for judging whether or not to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed based on a value and the predetermined suggestion to be executed by the judgment means An information storage unit for storing information on a specific display type when it is determined that the specific display type is selected as the display type of the effect, the gaming machine further comprising: When selecting whether to select a predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter in selecting the display type, the predetermined display type and the information stored in the information storage means When the predetermined display type is the same, a means for displaying the predetermined display type or the predetermined display type as a display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, and an operation operable by the player And one of the predetermined ones of the predetermined suggested effects provided with a plurality of types of effects different in the display mode, in the change effect, a predetermined time after the execution of the change effect is started. The period during which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect performing means, triggered by the operation of the operation means, is executed by the suggestion effect executing means when the passage has occurred, and after the execution of the one indication effect, Provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, and variation effect of dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means Main control means having selection means for selecting a type, and a fluctuation effect execution means for executing the fluctuation effect based on the type of the fluctuation effect selected by the selection means according to an instruction from the main control means A sub-control means, and when a predetermined identification information is revealed in the change effect executed by the change effect execution means, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, The control means has a plurality of predetermined suggestion effects for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect, while the fluctuation effect executing means performs one time of the fluctuation effect. It comprises: suggestion effect execution means to be executed; and selection means for selecting an expected degree type indicated by the predetermined indication effect performed by the indication effect execution means for each of the predetermined indication effects, the predetermined indication effect Shows a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the display types when displaying the display modes, and the selection means is in the variation effect It is possible to select all kinds of the display types for the first predetermined suggestion effect, and the predetermined range in which the counter is updated and the predetermined range in which the counter is updated is predetermined at the predetermined update timing. Is executed based on defining means for storing boundary values corresponding to a plurality of display types that can be displayed by the suggested effect corresponding to each display type, the boundary value, and the value of the counter. As a display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, a determination unit that determines whether or not to select the display type in order of the degree of expectation, and a specific display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed by the determination unit And an information storage means for storing information on a specific display type when it is determined that the display type is selected, and the gaming machine is further adapted to select the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed. When it is determined whether to select a predetermined display type based on the value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type and the specific display type stored in the information storage unit are the same. In some cases, the display device further comprises means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as a display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, and an operation means operable by the player, the table One of the predetermined suggested effects provided with a plurality of types of effects having different display modes is the suggested effect execution when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change effect was started in the variable effect. Since it is executed by the means and after the execution of the one suggestion effect, the predetermined presentation effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means in response to the operation of the operation means as a trigger, the interest to the game is provided. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the distraction.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type table, (c) is a schematic diagram for the jackpot variation pattern table (D) is a schematic view schematically showing the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table, and (e) is schematically outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a timing chart which shows temporal progress of the fluctuation production performed by super reach A. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the comment display 151, and (b) is the third pattern in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on a display device 81. It is the model which showed typically the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the preliminary announcement production by the super reach selection 153. FIG. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the preliminary announcement production by the character appearance 154. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the cut-in image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the advance production by the cut-in 155. FIG. It is a figure explaining the aspect which shows the expectation of the jackpot in each advance production, and the determination upper limit pointer given with respect to each expectation. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table for fluctuation. It is the model which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flow chart which showed the notice production processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production rank determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the boot processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing pending ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing decision command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device FIG. 14C is a flowchart showing demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU in the indicator control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production rank determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a first rank determination table 222c1, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a second rank determination table 222c2. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the third rank determination table 222c3, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4, (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the 5 rank determination table 222c5 typically. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production rank determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production rank determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flow chart which showed the notice production processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production rank determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a.

  Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is a button for receiving an operation instruction (for example, a pressing instruction) by the player. When an instruction to operate the frame button 22 is issued, the pachinko machine 10 changes the screen display of the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, or changes the output sound and the lamp display to allow the player to play a game. It is possible to participate actively.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation The symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, of the balls (retention balls) of which the fluctuation has not been executed The number of holding balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a lottery performed for entering a ball at the first ball entry port 64, a determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is made, and when it is determined to be a big hit, it is also made to determine its big hit type. As jackpot types to be determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and time-speaking jackpots are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. In addition, “time / day / big hit” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) becomes a time-shortened state.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of In the high-probability state (in a definite variation) in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) to be described later is increased, and the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened. By becoming easy, the state of the game in which a ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 is included.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases with the jackpot probability unchanged. The motorized prize associated with the first ball entry port 64 is more likely to be released, which means a gaming state in which the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry port 64.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric role associated with the first ball entry 64 opens or the hitting in the second symbol The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed. For example, in the low probability state or the high probability state, the open time of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be longer than that in the other gaming states. Further, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the motorized combination per one time in the second symbol is larger than that of the other gaming states.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 configured by (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second ball entrance 67 The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 14) described later, for example, the left, middle And three right symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the variable display (variation effect) in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is It is supposed to be done. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a view exemplifying the actual display screen. Further, FIG. 4 schematically shows the area division setting of the display screen and the effective line setting.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the fluctuation effect in which the same main design is aligned is performed by the third symbol display device 81 The jackpot is generated so that the jackpot will occur after the change effect is over. In the case of shifting to a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the big hit, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high probability patterns”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "low probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

  The fluctuation display area Dm is an area in which a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the variable display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, in the variable display area Dm, a total of nine third symbols of 3 columns × 3 stages are displayed.

  Here, the middle part of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set as the valid line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in order, the valid line The third symbol is displayed stopped on L1. If it arranges with a combination of big hit symbols on the effective line L1 at the time of the stop of the third symbol (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment), it becomes a big hit and a big hit effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, and the like on the back side of the third symbol, and displays a notice effect while the variable effect is being performed in the variable display area Dm. This is an area for displaying various effect images.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation production currently being performed, and the player can be made to know the expectation of becoming a big hit by the contents of the image displayed in the notice effect. It has become. The player can enhance the sense of expectation of becoming a big hit by watching the notice effect displayed during the change effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, from the fluctuation production of a short fluctuation time to the fluctuation production of a long fluctuation time are prepared, the notice production is configured to be performed more as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production is longer. That is because if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is long, the player may get bored until it is stopped and displayed, and by executing a large number of advance effects, the player can be displayed every time the advance effect is displayed. Can be expected to have a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game for the player, and to continue the game.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, for a part of the notice effects, the notice effect is displayed in the effect display area Db only when the player operates the frame button 22 during the predetermined period of the change effect, and it is expected that a big hit will be made. The degree is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to operate the frame button 22 during the variable effect, and the player can actively participate in the gaming machine.

  In addition, the detail of the advance notice effect displayed in the effect display area Db will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

  In the effect display area Db, a back image that matches the stage of the effect is also displayed on the back side of the character and the character information. The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. And the fluctuation effect (the change which performs the fluctuation display (dynamic display) of the third symbol) performed with entering the ball (the start winning combination) to the first ball entrance 64 mentioned later, the reach effect, the notice effect etc. The various effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage change is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island" It changes repeatedly in the order of "stage" → "town stage" → .... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  The reserved display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of balls held, which is the number of balls (held balls) whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered Is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated in the hold display area Ds.

  In the holding display area Ds, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the holding display area Ds, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. In addition, when the holding ball number design is not displayed in the holding display area Ds, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball. The player can grasp the number of holding balls currently held at that time from the number of holding balls displayed in the holding display area Ds.

  In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the hold display area Ds, the number of number-held ball is different by a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of number-hold ball It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12 etc. are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, for the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately lights a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first ball inlet 64 is activated only for a predetermined time (open Be configured to be). The number of times of passage of the second ball entrance 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) . Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control unit 110 makes a lottery for a big hit, and the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol according to the lottery result is the third symbol display The stop display is made on the effective line L1 of the device 81 (the variation display area Dm). In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the ball entry is held up to four times at maximum . And the fluctuation production corresponding to the held ball (holding ball) is performed after the end of the fluctuation playing corresponding to the holding ball previously held. As described above, the number of holding balls (the number of holding balls) held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the held display area Ds.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, although it was comprised so that the ball input to the 1st ball entrance 64 may be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum holding ball number is not limited to 4 times, 3 times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times).

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is constituted by an 8-bit microcomputer, and the ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and various data etc. temporarily when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. In addition, in the RAM 203, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (a big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.) are controlled. There are various counters to do this.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, some of the counters are periodically updated during the main process (see FIG. 28). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at the update timing of the counter for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The reserve area is each value of the first collision random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read out from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (pending). Also, the execution area stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the change pattern of the big hit lottery and the change effect and the stop type at the start timing of the change. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1 of the counter buffer 203b at that time, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. The value is stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas. At this time, when there is no hold in the hold area and all the first to fourth areas are vacant, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first and second areas for storage, the value of each counter is stored in the third area for reservation. If there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the fourth area. Thereby, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the start winning combination. Can. When the start winning combination is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to at most four start winnings.

  Further, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area, and Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, and the determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of stop symbol are performed.

  In addition, after the value of each counter in the first reserve area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the second reserve area is shifted to the first reserve area which is free and stored in the third reserve area. The value of each counter is shifted to the reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding decreases by one, and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 was sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reached the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899) It is done by returning to 0 after. In the case where the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, but also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 28).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203c at the start of fluctuation is the value of a random number (large jack random number; also referred to as a winning value) Make a lottery. The value of the jackpot random number (jackpot random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the holding sphere storage area 203c (execution of the holding sphere storage area 203c) If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in area A) matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is successful.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The big hit random number table 202a indicates the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be big hit. In the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot random number value referred to in the low probability state (that is, a period during which the gaming state is not definite) and a jackpot random number value referred to in the gaming state high probability state (that is, positive variation) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “low probability state”. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the high probability state is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 809, 836, 866, 892” are associated with the “high probability state”, and the jackpot random number table 202a is It is stored.

  The MPU 201 reads out from the jackpot random number table 203a a jackpot random number value matching the gaming state at the time of making a jackpot determination. Then, the MPU 201 uses the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c) used for the big hit determination to read the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is in the low probability state, the first hit is made when the value of the random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the case of the low probability state is 1/300. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, A jackpot occurs when it matches any one of “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and it is likely that the jackpot may be improperly attracted. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), The first hit random number counter C1 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserve area in the reserve sphere storage area 203c is a random number that makes a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect become the one at the big win . In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table 202 b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two round jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of a first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7 (a), the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 ... of the first hit type counter C2 for the 15R normal jackpot. 79 "is associated, and the value" 80 to 99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of becoming out of position, for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the type of stop selected in this embodiment, after reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and after the same reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (rendering) patterns: "reach other than out of front and back" where "stops" except before and after reach symbol and "complete out" where reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes out, the stop type in the fluctuation effect Will be at the time of departure. In this case, the type of stop at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to 98, 99 for “front and back out of reach”, 90 to 97 for “front and back out of reach”, “front and back out of reach” and “reach other than for back and forth out” is narrow It becomes difficult to select out-of-reach and out-of-front reach.

  In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining the fluctuation pattern, and for example, is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 28).

  At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and executes the fluctuation pattern to be executed in the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuation effect Decide. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation.

  That is, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select the third symbol from among the variation modes in which the variation display can be performed in the variation time The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, in accordance with the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 causes the sound output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. While making it output, the lamp | ramp of the lamp display apparatus 227 (electric decoration parts 29-33) is made to light-up and blink-display.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time can be determined by decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer and can not perform complicated processing, but when the change pattern is determined, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the change time. As compared with the case where the detail of the variation mode is determined by the main controller 110, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be performed easily. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control apparatus 113 etc., and the command necessary for the notification may be There is a risk that it will have to be composed of bytes or more, and sending and receiving of commands may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, so if the voice lamp control device 113 or the like is notified of only the information related to the determined fluctuation time Well, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the transmission and reception of the command becomes complicated. In addition, even if only the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is determined in main controller 110, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 determines the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time among many fluctuation modes. Since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the fluctuation display in the determined fluctuation mode, a variety of fluctuation effects can be given to the player, thereby improving the player's interest be able to.

  Now, in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot used at the time of big hit, and used at the time of deviation A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d for variation, the variation pattern for variation (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at a definite variation or a low probability state at a normal time excluding a short time status. A table 202d2 and an off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

  Here, the details of the various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). First, FIG. 7C is a view schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot dedicated to be referred to when 2R probability variation jackpot. The values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the big-hit random number value at the start of the change, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first per-classification counter C2 stored in the execution area In response, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

  Commonly to the 15R jackpot, there are a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. As for the correspondence between the fluctuations A and B and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is 0 to 39, and the fluctuation B is 40 to 198.

  When the change A (30 seconds) is selected as the change pattern, the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 causes a change effect to be performed in a normal reach mode. When the change B (60 seconds) is selected as the change pattern, the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 causes a change effect to be performed in a super reach mode.

  Nord reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a blind stop). In addition, the super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach) after reaching a fluctuation time longer than the normal reach. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, the super reach is likely to be selected to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring the normal reach to be selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  A large number of normal reach and super reach executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are prepared with different effects even if the change time is the same. For example, in addition to a normal reach where no character is displayed, one or more predetermined characters or character information may be obtained when two symbols on the activated line L1 become the same symbol and reach the reach state or at other timings. A reach is provided to display the times and perform advance notice effects. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. Furthermore, multiple reach with different presentation content is prepared, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and is displayed, a reach to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and a reach to which a jackpot effect is added by re-change ing. As a result, a variety of fluctuation effects can be performed, and the player's interest can be enhanced. The reach where the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during one change effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

  Next, the variation pattern selected for exclusive use by the 2R probability variation jackpot is only 2R variation with a variation time of 31 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one of the plurality of prepared 2R probability variation jackpot-only fluctuation modes is selected by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 The variation production is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, for example, a variation pattern in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken", or "girl" that does not normally appear Along with the character, a variation such as that the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter may be provided to finely adjust the fluctuation time to about ± several seconds, and a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect may be added before or during the fluctuation effect. May be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7D, the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is completely out-only only and is referred to when the complete out is determined as the type of stop at the out, and the back and forth out of reach and back and forth out It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common which is referred to when the non-reach is determined and the stop type at the time of out-of-range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the beginning of the change is not a value that will be a big hit (large hit random number value), that is, it is a value that comes off, excluding the time saving state gaming state When in the normal low probability state, the fluctuation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area The pattern is determined from the outlier (usually) change pattern.

  For the complete deviation only, there are fluctuation D where fluctuation is finished in a short time of 7 seconds and reach is not realized as fluctuation pattern and fluctuation E where a fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds and fluctuation D but reach is not realized. In association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 149, and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) is 150 to 198. Further, in reach common, there are the above-mentioned fluctuation A (30 seconds) and fluctuation B (60 seconds) as fluctuation patterns, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is such that fluctuation A (30 seconds) is 0 197, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 198.

  FIG. 7E is a view schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7E, the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete out-of-range is decided as the stop type at the time of out-of-out Are separated into a reach common to be referred to when a reach other than the front and back out of reach and a reach other than the front and back out are determined as stop types at the time of exit. Then, for each divided group, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group. Note that the fluctuation patterns selected when reference is made only to complete deviation are fluctuation D (7 seconds) and fluctuation E (10 seconds), as in the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. Further, the fluctuation pattern selected when the reach common is referenced is also fluctuation A (30 seconds) and fluctuation B (60 seconds), as in the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not make a big hit, that is, it is a value that becomes out, execution is performed when the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is the out (probable change) change pattern table 202d2 It is determined from

  In this deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for complete deviation only is such that fluctuation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190 and fluctuation E (10 seconds) is 191 to 198. It has become. Further, in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in common reach, the variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 197, and the variation B is 198.

  Since the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of definite change, the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64 Become. Therefore, when a relatively long fluctuation E of fluctuation time is frequently performed while in the short time state or high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation display, giving the player a waiting state, The player may feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, in the case of complete removal, when the gaming state is in the short time state or in the high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation D is shorter than the fluctuation E than in the normal state except the time reduction state. By being configured to be easily selected and performing the start of the next variable display early, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the other variation type counter whether or not the first symbol (or third symbol) to be finally stopped is shifted (for example, one symbol is deviated back and forth etc.) It may be determined by

  Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, a plurality of holding balls are present even when the gaming state is normal. (For example, in the case of the maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables for respective deviations shown in FIG. 7 (d) and FIG. 7 (e), when the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply deviated and the deviation is selected, another table is referred to. The variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Referring back to FIG. 6, the various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, 1 is added sequentially in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250) It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be won when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Is lighted and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like are stored in addition to the counter buffer 203b for storing various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, values of I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 28), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a holding ball number counter 203a. The holding ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waits) up to four times. The initial value of this holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the variable display based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 25). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one after being entered into the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the number of balls in the variable display itself which is suspended in the main controller 110 by the number-of-balls-in-hold command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the number-of-balls counter 203a is incremented. You can get As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the number of holding balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the ball has been dropped, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the symbol of holding ball number in the holding display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of holding ball notified by the command of holding ball number for display.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 has at least a detailed variation pattern table 222a and a determination upper limit pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 holds a ball number counter 223a, a detail variation pattern counter 223b, a notice effect flag 223c, a notice effect counter 223d, a judgment rank counter 223e, It has at least a 2 pointer 223 f and a frame button operation flag 223 g. Here, first, the reserved ball number counter 223a will be described, and then, the detailed variation pattern counter 223b, the detailed variation pattern table 222a, and the announcement effect flag 223c will be described. Thereafter, the advance presentation counter 223d, the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the frame button operation flag 223g will be described in this order.

  The holding ball number counter 223a is, like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203 a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the number holding ball counter 223a.

  Specifically, in the case of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variation effect is added by entering the first entrance ball 64, and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main control unit 110 included in the pending ball number command (ie, pending at the main control unit 110 The stored ball number of the variation effect) is stored in the stored ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 32).

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is transmitted along with the reception. If the mode of the variable display in the display device 81 is set, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). As described above, since the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the holding ball number counter 223a is used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the command for holding ball number in the holding ball number counter 223a, or the number of holding ball counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a after storing or updating, at the timing of updating the value of D, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display ball holding number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the hold display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2751 of FIG. 46A). As described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the holding display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 while synchronizing with the value of the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a are counters for determining the fluctuation aspect (detailed fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect to be started based on the fluctuation pattern notified from the main controller 110 by the fluctuation pattern command. And a table.

  In the present embodiment, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (a variation time of 30 seconds) is instructed from the main controller 110 by a variation pattern command. In addition to the normal reach, there are prepared a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while changing. The normal reach includes a variation pattern in which the advance presentation is performed a plurality of times during one variation presentation.

  In addition, as a detailed pattern determined when fluctuation B (a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, or a rear image is rapidly displayed. There are several super-reaches available. The super reach includes a change pattern in which the advance notice is performed more frequently than in the case of the normal reach during the one change production.

  Also, as a detailed variation pattern determined when 2R variation (a variation time of 31 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots with a variation time of 31 seconds are prepared.

  When the detailed variation pattern counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern table 222a receive the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, a plurality of variation pattern counters prepared for the variation patterns notified by the variation pattern command Among the detailed variation patterns, it is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on with respect to the variation pattern command.

  The detail variation pattern counter 223b is periodically updated (in the processing of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the present embodiment). The detailed variation pattern counter 223b is configured by a loop counter, and the update thereof is sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value (99) It is done by. Further, an initial value "0" is set in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed at the time of power on.

  The detailed variation pattern table 222a corresponds to various detailed variation patterns prepared for each variation pattern for each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, 2R variation) notified from the main controller 110. Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b is determined. In addition, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B, depending on whether the symbol displayed in the fluctuation effect is "big hit" or "drift" 2R fluctuation) is separately associated.

  When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, it reads out the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. Then, when it is determined from the variation type notified by the received stop type command that a big hit is made, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b read from the RAM 223 in the "big hit" of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command Are identified from the detailed variation pattern table 222a. In addition, when it is determined that the variation type notified by the received stop type command is out, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b read out from the RAM 223 in the "out" of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command Are identified from the detailed variation pattern table 222a.

  The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and causes the display control device 114 to display the determined detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed fluctuation pattern notified by the display fluctuation pattern command. As a result, by the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect by the determined detailed fluctuation pattern is performed.

  In addition, when the variation D (a variation time of 7 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, one detailed variation pattern of an aspect in which the variation is completely out after 7 seconds has elapsed is prepared. There is. When a change E (a change time of 10 seconds) is indicated, one change pattern is prepared for the details of the aspect in which the change is completely missed after a change time of 10 seconds has elapsed.

  Therefore, when the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is instructed from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 determines the detailed fluctuation pattern prepared corresponding to each, regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223a, Based on this, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display.

  The advance effect flag 223c is a flag indicating that the variable effect being executed is performed by a change pattern in which the advance effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect. When the advance effect flag 223c is on, it indicates that the variable effect being performed is being performed by the change pattern, and when it is off, the variable effect being performed is being performed by the other change pattern Show.

  The advance effect flag 223c is determined based on the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. Are set by the MPU 221 in accordance with the determined detailed fluctuation pattern. That is, when the determined detailed change pattern is a change pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the advance effect flag 223c is set to ON, and the determined detail change pattern is the other change If it is a pattern, the advance effect flag 223c is set to off.

  The MPU 221 performs control to execute the notice effect in the changing effect being executed when the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON. The details of the control will be described later.

  Here, referring to FIG. 8 to FIG. 13, it is a variation pattern prepared for variation A, and is a normal reach in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and a variation pattern prepared for variation B. The super reach where the advance presentation is performed multiple times will be described.

  In order to simplify the description, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that one normal reach and one super reach in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times are prepared, and are referred to as normal reach A and super reach A, respectively. However, it goes without saying that the present invention is applicable even if a plurality of such normal reach and special reach are prepared.

  First, FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the time course of the fluctuation effect performed by the super reach A. In the timing chart of FIG. 8, the number of seconds described in parentheses indicates the elapsed time when the start of fluctuation is 0 seconds.

  In the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, first, when the fluctuation is started, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4) is accelerated from the stopped (stationary) state to a high speed scroll state The third symbol display device 81 displays a high-speed variation in which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll at a high speed which can not be recognized by the player for a predetermined second. Then, after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are sequentially stopped, and reach is established, and the normal reach scrolls the middle symbol row Z2 at a medium speed or a low speed visible to the player for 20 seconds. The variation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the fluctuation presentation by the normal reach A, the same high-speed fluctuation (10 seconds) and the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) as the fluctuation presentation by the super reach A are performed. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped 30 seconds after the start of the change, and the third symbol is stopped (fixed display).

  On the other hand, in the change effect by the super reach A, after displaying the normal reach change for 20 seconds (after 30 seconds from the start of the change), an image for notifying the player of development to the super reach change (developed image ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for 10 seconds.

  Thus, until the end of the normal reach change, the change effect is performed with the same contents in the change effect by the super reach A and the change effect by the normal reach A. As a result, the player can not grasp whether it is due to Normal Reach A or Super Reach A. As described above, when the change effect is performed by the super reach, the expectation of becoming a big hit as a result of the change effect is higher than in the case of the normal reach. Therefore, as the player approaches the end of the normal reach change, the final display of the third symbol is performed as it is and the change effect is ended as the normal reach, or the developed image is displayed to develop into the super reach change and the super It will watch over the fluctuation production while expecting whether the fluctuation production will end as a reach. Therefore, even in the case where the fluctuation effect is performed by the normal reach with a low degree of expectation, which is a big hit, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuation effect without getting bored.

  In the developed image displayed by the change effect by the super reach A, the player can be developed into the super reach by changing the back image displayed in the effect display area Db from the one displayed until then. I have notified.

  Further, in the advanced image in the super reach A, the fluctuation display of the third symbol displayed in the fluctuation display area Dm is moved to the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed smaller. . The fluctuation display of the third symbol is performed in the state of being displayed in a small size until immediately before the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed. In this way, various characters and character information can be displayed on the effect display area Db without being affected by the fluctuation display of the third symbol in the subsequent super reach change, so that elaborate effects in the super reach change are performed. If so, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player by the elaborate effect which made the player pay attention to it.

  After displaying the developed image for 10 seconds, that is, 40 seconds after the start of the change, in the change presentation by the super reach A, the super reach change is performed for 20 seconds. In super reach change in this super reach A, an expectation to a jackpot is displayed by displaying characters and character information in the variable display area Db while performing reach display of the third symbol in the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. By raising the degree, the interest of the player in the game is enhanced. Then, 60 seconds after the start of the change, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed while the all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed large again in the variation display area Dm shown in FIG. In this final display of the third symbol, a jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbols are aligned (combination of the same main symbols) on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 4). Moreover, it will remove | deviate, when the combination of a big hit design is not equal on the effective line L1.

  By the way, in the change effect by the super reach A and the change effect by the normal reach A, as described above, the notice effects are performed at various timings, and in some notice effects, there is an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. To be done if Next, a description will be given of the change effect by the super reach A and the notice effect performed in the change effect by the normal reach A.

  In the change effect by the super reach A and the change effect by the normal reach A, as shown in FIG. 8, first, the comment display 151 is performed as the advance effect during the high speed change. The comment display 151 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the player's operation instruction of the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button being turned on).

  The notice effect by the comment display 151 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, when high-speed change is started in the change effect by the super reach A and the change effect by the normal reach A, the boy 161 (see FIG. 9A) displays the effect display of the third symbol display device 81 two seconds after the start It is displayed in the area Db. When the boy 161 is displayed, a frame button operation acceptance period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 is started, and an image (not shown) prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed together with the boy 161 in the effect display area Db. . The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and while the frame button operation acceptance period is continued, an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 continues to be displayed in the effect display area Db.

  Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the 5-second frame button operation acceptance period, the boy 161 disappears from the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the notice effect by the comment display 151 is not performed, We will continue to make the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period, the frame button operation acceptance period is ended at that time, and the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the details of the notice effect by the comment display 151 will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the comment display 151.

  In the notice effect by the comment display 151, the balloon 162 is displayed in the effect display area Db from the image of the boy 161 previously displayed in the effect display area Db, and in the balloon 162, "presence of a big hit ...?!" , And display text information such as "Like May!"

  In addition, at the time when the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed, the change display of the third symbol is performed so as to cover the effect display area Db, but the change display of the third symbol at this time is a game It is a high-speed fluctuation that can not be recognized by the player, and the image displayed in the effect display area Db can be sufficiently viewed by the player.

  In the comment display 151, the character information displayed in the balloon 161 can give an expectation that the player may be hit. However, this character information is configured to be selected at random when an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is received. That is, the character information itself of the balloon 161 does not represent the expectation of winning a jackpot, but is for enhancing the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, a frame (frame) 163 is provided around the balloon 162, and the display color of the frame 163 represents the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation to be a big hit will be described. FIG. 13 is a view for explaining an aspect showing the expectation of the jackpot in each preliminary announcement effect. Although FIG. 13 also shows the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, the determination upper limit value pointer 222b will be described later.

  In FIG. 13, the ranks indicating the degree of expectation to be the jackpot are indicated by “1” to “5”. And rank "1" is the rank with the lowest expectation with a big hit, and rank "2" is rank with the second lowest expectation with a big win. Then, as the ranks go up to "3" and "4", the expectation for a big hit becomes higher, and the rank "5" is a rank for which the expectation for a big hit is 100%, that is, a big win.

  Each of the notice effects performed in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A has five patterns, and different ranks are associated with the respective patterns. In each advance notice effect, by executing the effect in accordance with one pattern selected from the five patterns, the player is given an expectation of becoming a big hit to five ranks from the contents of the effect executed in the advance notice effect. Can be shown. In addition, the degree of expectation of the jackpot in each rank is set the same regardless of which preliminary announcement effect. That is, in the case where the expectation of the same rank is indicated in the first preview effect of 1 and the other preview effect of another, the degree of expectation shown in each of the preliminary effects is the same expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, when the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 is white, a rank “1” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is blue, a rank “2” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is red, a rank “3” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is a tiger pattern, a rank “4” is indicated as the degree of expectation. Then, when the display color of the frame 163 is rainbow color (rainbow), it indicates rank “5” (that is, 100% jackpot) as an expectation.

  What is the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 is the result (the jackpot or the jackpot) of the fluctuation production for which the advance production is performed, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production (normal reach A or super reach A) And the frame button 22 is randomly selected at the time of accepting that the frame button 22 has been operated by the player. The determination method will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the advance presentation effect is continued. In the fluctuation production by Super Reach A and the fluctuation production by Normal Reach A, a notice production is performed even during normal reach fluctuation. Specifically, a notice effect is produced by a child character appearance 152 in which a child character appears during normal reach change. The notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is automatically displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9B, the details of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152. As shown in FIG.

  In the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, 5 seconds after the start of the normal reach change (15 seconds after the change start), the approximate center of the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 8, that is, The child 164 is displayed on the rear side of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, while the normal reach change is being performed, the child 164 is moved according to the movement of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 which is scrolled at a medium speed or a low speed visible to the player, and the child 164 looks like a middle symbol. It is shown to the player as if the column Z2 is being scrolled. As a result, the player is watching the motion of the fluctuation in anticipation that the player will be displayed with the jackpot symbol while watching the movement of the child 164, and while watching the movement of the movement, while the movement of the movement is being performed, People can be concentrated.

  Here, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the color of the clothes 164a worn by the child 164 indicates an expectation of becoming a big hit. Here, referring to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164a and the expectation for becoming a big hit will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, when the color of the clothes 164a worn by the child 164 is white, a rank “1” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is blue, a rank “2” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is red, a rank “3” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is a tiger pattern, a rank “4” is shown as the degree of expectation. Then, in the case where the color of the clothes 164a is rainbow color (rainbow), a rank “5” (that is, 100% jackpot) is shown as the degree of expectation. As described above, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164 a and the degree of expectation is the same as the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the preview effect by the comment display 151.

  The color of the clothes 164a of the child 164 depends on the result of the change effect for which the advance effect is performed (whether it is a big hit or a drop) and the change pattern of the change effect (normal reach A or super reach A) And randomly determined at the time of giving a notice effect by the child character appearance 152. The determination method will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the advance presentation effect is continued. In the change production by Super Reach A, a preview production is performed even while displaying the development image. Specifically, a notice effect by super reach selection 153 for selecting the type of super reach is performed while displaying the development image. In the super reach selection 153, the type (reach type) of the super reach variation displayed following the development image is selected from the five reach types according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Yes, and depending on the selected reach species, it shows the expectation of winning a jackpot.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the details of the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 will be described. FIG. 10 is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, in the developed image in which the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is performed, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed large in the effect display area Db.

  The notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is started 2 seconds after the development image is displayed, that is, 32 seconds after the start of the change, and the image shown in FIG. 10 is displayed. In this image, the treasure chest 165 is displayed in the central part of the effect display area Db, and the character information of “Destruct the treasure chest!” Is displayed at the top. In this way, the player is notified that the jackpot effect will be performed during the super reach change if the treasure box can be destroyed. Further, the boy 166 is displayed on the left part of the effect display area Db, a balloon is displayed from the boy 166, and character information of "Determine the vandals! Press the button!" Is displayed in the balloon. In addition, in the right part of the effect display area Db, the image of the child 167, the image of the male 168, the image of the witch 169, and the image of the thunder god 170 are displayed as candidates for the vandal. Then, one of the images of the child 167, the male 168, the witch 169, and the thunder god 170 is highlighted (in FIG. 10, the child 167 is highlighted), and the highlighted images are sequentially switched at high speed. . As a result, the player is made to recognize that the batter is selected by operating the frame button operation 22.

  In the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, reach species of super reach fluctuation to be performed thereafter are respectively associated with each vandalist selected here. That is, "one shot reach" is displayed for the child 167, which displays an effect in which the child 167 strikes and destroys the treasure box only once during super reach change, and for the male 168, "Round hit reach" is displayed that displays the effect that the male 168 tries to hit and destroy the treasure box during the super reach change, and for the witch 169, the witch 169 applies magic to the treasure box during the super reach change. The “magic reach” to be destroyed is associated, and the “lemon reach” to which the lightning 170 drops the lightning to destroy the treasure box during the super reach change is associated with the lightning 170. Furthermore, although not displayed on the notice effect screen by the super reach selection 153, as the reach species to be selected here, the Buddha 172 (see FIG. 11 (b)) further casts a sutra to open the treasure box " There is a Buddha-like reach.

  As described above, these reach species represent the expectation of becoming a big hit after the change production. Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the reach type selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 and the degree of expectation to be a big hit will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13, if the reach type selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is “one shot reach”, it indicates rank “1” as the expectation degree, and if it is “continuous hit reach”, the expectation degree If rank "2" is shown, if "magic reach", rank "3" is shown as an expectation, if it is "lightning reach", rank "4" is shown as an expectation, and "buddy reach" For example, rank "5" is indicated as the degree of expectation. That is, “Buddha-like reach” is a reach species with a 100% expectation for becoming a jackpot. The image of Buddha 172 is not displayed in the preview effect by Super Reach selection 153, but this undisplayed Buddha 172 is displayed at the start of Super Reach, and the Super Reach variation is performed with the Buddha 172 as a motif. It is possible to strongly impress on the player the development to a special reach, that is, a so-called premium reach where the expectation to jackpot is 100%. This can greatly enhance the player's interest in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is continued. As for the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, the above-mentioned "one shot reach", "striking hit" of the reach type of the super reach variation Select from among "reach", "magic reach", "lightning reach" and "buddy reach". Then, the player is notified of the selection result by displaying a character image corresponding to the selected reach type in a notice effect by a later-described character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach change. This makes it possible for the player to appear as if the vandalist who destroys the treasure box is selected based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the preview effect by the super reach selection 153.

  At the time of the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is when the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is started (that is, the image shown in FIG. It is received during the frame button operation reception period starting at the time of display). The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and while the frame button operation acceptance period continues, the image of FIG. 10 continues to be displayed in the effect display area Db.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation reception period, the frame button operation reception period is ended at that time, and the reach type is “one shot reach”, “continuous hit reach”, Choose from "Magic reach", "Lightning reach" and "Buddha-like reach". On the other hand, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the 5-second frame button operation acceptance period, the frame button operation acceptance period is ended, and at that time, the reach type is "one shot reach", " Select from among "Strike hit reach", "Magic reach", "Lightning reach", and "Buddha like reach".

  Which reach species to select is based on the result (presence or omission) of the fluctuation production for which the advance production is performed and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production (normal reach A or super reach A) When the frame button 22 is not operated and the frame button operation acceptance period is ended without the frame button 22 being operated, it is determined randomly. The determination method will be described later.

  In the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, as described above, the image of the destroyer corresponding to the selected reach species is not displayed immediately, but is displayed by the notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach change. Do. After the completion of the frame button operation acceptance period, the content of the balloon of the boy 166 shown in FIG. 10 was changed to text information "Who is a vandalist?" On the top, the highlight display that is performed for the child 167, the male 168, the witch 169, and the thunder god 170 is continued. By this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 while giving the player a sense of expectation that the destroyer is selected until the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is displayed.

  Next, the notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed by the change effect by the super reach A will be described. The notice effect by the character appearance 154 is a notice effect performed at the same time as the super reach change starts (develops to the super reach), and is selected from the super reach change selected in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 previously performed. The reach type is notified to the player by displaying the image of the character associated with the reach type in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 is not selected by determining the rank indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot again at the time of the advance notice effect and performing the advance notice effect in the pattern according to the rank In accordance with the reach species that have been made, a notice effect is given. The notice effect by the character appearance 154 is automatically performed when the super reach change is started.

  Here, referring to FIG. 13 again, the character displayed in the effect display area Db by the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, and the degree of expectation to be a big hit Explain the relationship between

  As shown in FIG. 13, when “one shot reach” whose rank of expectation is “1” is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the child character is associated in the notice effect by the character appearance 154. The image of the child is displayed on the effect display area Db at the start of the super reach change. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "one shot reach" starts, and to make it possible to grasp that the jackpot is the lowest rank "1" with the lowest degree of expectation.

  If "expected hit" having a rank of "2" is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, male characters are associated in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, and the super reach fluctuation is At the start, a male image is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach change due to the “double hit reach” starts, and to make it possible to grasp that the jackpot expectation is the second lowest rank “2”.

  When "magic reach" having the rank of expectation of "3" is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the witch character is associated, and the super reach fluctuation is At the start, the image of the witch is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach change due to "magic reach" starts, and to make it possible to grasp that the jackpot expectation is the third highest rank "3".

  When "Learning reach" whose rank of expectation is "4" is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character of the thunder god is associated, and the super reach fluctuation is At the start, an image of thunder is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach change due to the "lightning reach" is started, and to make it possible to grasp that the jackpot expectation is the second highest rank "4".

  When "Buddha-like reach" whose rank of expectation is "5" is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character of the Buddha is associated and super reach At the start of the change, an image of Buddha is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach change due to "Buddha reach" starts, and to make it possible to grasp that the jackpot expected rank to be 100% is "5".

  When a predetermined character is displayed in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character has a unique color. For example, for a child corresponding to "one shot reach" whose rank of expectation is "1", the clothes of the child are displayed as "white", and "placed hit reach" whose rank of expectation is "2" For men who correspond to, the man's clothes are displayed in "blue", and for the witch corresponding to "magic reach" whose rank of expectation is "3", the clothes of the witch are displayed in "red" And about thunder god corresponding to "lightning reach" whose rank of expectation degree is "4", the thunder god displays cloth with "Tora pattern", and "buddha like that rank of expectation degree is" 5 " For the Buddha that corresponds to "Leach", the back light pointing to Buddha is displayed as "Rainbow".

  That is, the relationship between the color displayed in accordance with the character and the degree of expectation is the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the preview effect by the comment display 151 and the color of the clothes 164a in the preview effect by the child character appearance 152 It is the same as the relationship between Therefore, even by looking at the color displayed in each of the preliminary effects, it is possible to grasp the sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the fluctuation effect in which the preliminary effects are being performed, so the player can easily convey the degree of expectation. be able to. Therefore, a friendly game machine can be provided.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, and (a) shows an example when the image of the male 171 is displayed, (B) has shown the example at the time of displaying the image of Buddha 172 like.

  As shown in FIG. 11, also in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, since the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being influenced by the fluctuation display of the third symbol, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, and the player can It can enhance interest.

  In addition, in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character information of "the destroyer is ..." is displayed on the upper part of the effect display area Db, and the treasure box 165 is displayed on the left part of the effect display area Db. In the right part of the display area Db, the image of the character corresponding to the reach type selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed.

  For example, when the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is “continuous hit reach”, as shown in FIG. 11A, the image of the male 171 corresponding to the continuous hit reach in the effect display area Db Display on the right. This makes it possible for the player to grasp that a reach effect in which a man tries to destroy a treasure box in succession is performed, and the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit from the reach species which this player is made to rank is “2”. The player can be notified that Further, at this time, the clothes of the clothes 171a worn by the men 171 are displayed in “blue”, so that even if the player who is hard to understand the relationship between the reach species and the jackpot expectation degree, the expectation degree for being a jackpot from this color is ranked It can be easily understood that it is "2".

  In the super reach change, then, the effect in which the male 171 hits the treasure box 165 continuously is displayed in the effect display area Db, and in the case of the big hit, the treasure box 165 is destroyed by the male 171 and the right symbol row Z1 and the left symbol row Z2 The same third symbol ("7" in the example of FIG. 11 (a)) as the third symbol in the stop display pops out of the treasure box 165, and it is stopped and displayed as the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, in the case of detachment, the male 171 can not destroy the treasure box 165, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the third symbol different from the third symbol in the stop display in the right symbol row Z1 and the left symbol row Z2 is stopped The effect to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the reach species selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is “Buddha-like reach”, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the image of the Buddha 172 corresponding to the Buddha-like reach is displayed Displayed on the right of the area Db. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp that the reach effect of opening the treasure box is performed by the Buddha chanting the passage, and the expectation degree of becoming a big hit from the reach species which this player is grasped is ranked “5 The player can be notified that the player is a "100% jackpot". Further, at this time, since the back light 172a of the Buddha 172 is displayed as "rainbow", even for a player who is difficult to understand the relationship between the reach type and the jackpot expectation degree, the expectation degree for becoming a jackpot from this color It can be easily understood that it is 5 ". Also, by displaying the image of Buddha 172 not displayed in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153 in the preview effect by the character appearance 154, as described above, a special reach for the player, that is, an expectation to the jackpot It can be strongly impressed that it has developed to the so-called premium reach where the degree is 100%. This can greatly enhance the player's interest in the game.

  In the super reach change, after that, the effect that Buddha 172 casts chanting is displayed in the effect display area Db, and finally the treasure box 165 is opened, and the third in the stop display in the right symbol row Z1 and the left symbol row Z2 The third symbol ("7" in the example of Fig. 11 (a)) same as the symbol pops out from the inside of the treasure box 165, and the third symbol display the effect that it is stopped and displayed as the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. Display on the device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the advance presentation effect is continued. In the change production by the super reach A, a cut-in 155 is further performed as a preliminary production during the super reach change. The cut-in 155 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81, triggered by the player's operation instruction of the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button is turned on).

  The notice effect by the cut-in 155 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, 5 seconds after the start of the super reach change (45 seconds after the start of change), a frame button operation acceptance period for receiving the operation of the frame button 22 is started, and an image prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 in the effect display area Db (Not shown) is displayed. The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for 10 seconds, and while the frame button operation acceptance period is continued, an image for prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed except for a cut-in image to be described later. Continue to be displayed on Db.

  Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation acceptance period for 10 seconds, the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is erased from the effect display area Db, and the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 is not performed. To continue the change production. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period, a cut-in image described later is displayed in the effect display area Db for one second at that time. In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, if it is a frame button operation reception period, the operation of the frame button 22 can be received many times, and the cut-in image is displayed whenever the operation of the frame button 22 is received. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the notice effect by the cut-in 155 will be described. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing a cut-in image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the cut-in 155. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, also in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, since the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 can be displayed on the effect display area Db without being influenced by the fluctuation display of the third symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect. It can enhance interest.

  In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the right eye 173 of the character displayed in the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is zoomed up and displayed in the notice effect area Db, and the cut-in frame 174 is produced so as to surround the zoomed right eye. Display in the display area Db. In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 represents the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit.

  Here, referring to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the expectation for becoming a big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is white, a rank “1” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is blue, a rank “2” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is red, a rank “3” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is a tiger pattern, a rank “4” is shown as the degree of expectation. And when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is rainbow color (rainbow), it shows rank "5" (that is, 100% jackpot) as an expectation degree.

  As described above, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the expectation for becoming a big win is the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the expectation in the preview effect by the comment display 151 This is the same as the relationship between the color of 164 a and the degree of expectation, and the relationship between the color and the degree of expectation displayed together with the character in the notice effect by the character appearance 154. Therefore, even by looking at the color displayed in each of the preliminary effects, it is possible to grasp the sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the fluctuation effect in which the preliminary effects are being performed, so the player can easily convey the degree of expectation. be able to. Therefore, a friendly game machine can be provided.

  The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined once each time the player operates the frame button 22 and an effect display of a cut-in image including the cut-in frame 174 displayed in the determined display color is performed. Display in the area Db. That is, each time the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is performed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 of the cut-in image displayed according to the operation is determined. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 many times while expecting the player to have a high expectation of becoming a big hit. Therefore, even while the fluctuation effect is being performed, the player can be made to actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, as to the display color of the cut-in frame 174, the result (the jackpot or the jackpot) of the change effect for which the advance effect is performed and the change pattern of the change effect (normal reach A or super reach) And A), the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is randomly determined at each timing when the operation instruction is received. The determination method will be described later.

  As described above, in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A, the advance effect is performed a plurality of times during the fluctuation effect. In addition, in the change production by the super reach A, which has a longer change time than the normal reach A, more advance notice effects are performed. If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is long, the player may get bored until the stop display is displayed, but by executing a large number of the advance effects, the player is notified to the jackpot every time the advance effect is displayed. It can give you a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game for the player, and to continue the game.

  In addition, each advance notice effect has five patterns, and different expectations are associated with each pattern. Then, in which pattern the notice effect is to be performed, in the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is accepted when the player operates the frame button 22 In the case of the advance effect by super reach selection 153 at the time of starting the advance effect, the time when the operation instruction of frame button 22 is accepted by the player or the frame button operation acceptance period of accepting the operation instruction of frame button 22 At the end point, decide randomly.

  Here, the pattern of each preliminary presentation effect is not determined collectively but is determined separately for each of the following reasons. That is, in the case of determining the patterns collectively, it is necessary to store in advance the combination of patterns to be set for each advance notice in the ROM 222. If a large number of combinations of patterns to be set for each advance notice effect are stored in the ROM 222, a plurality of advance notice effects can be executed during one fluctuation effect with a combination of more colorful patterns. However, when storing too many combinations of patterns in the ROM 222, a large storage capacity is required, and a large capacity ROM 222 is required. On the other hand, if the patterns are determined separately for each notice effect, a plurality of notices can be made during one variation effect by combining various patterns without storing the combination of patterns set for the notice effect in the ROM 222. A presentation can be performed.

  Further, in each of the notice effects by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, at the time of receiving the operation instruction of the frame button 22, it is randomly determined which pattern out of five patterns. There are also the following reasons. If the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in advance before the frame button operation acceptance period, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the advance notice effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, the player does not feel the importance of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, and there is a possibility that the frame button 22 may be operated unintentionally. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the time when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which pattern is to be randomly selected from the five patterns. Therefore, according to the reception timing of the operation instruction of the frame button 22 The pattern to be selected is changed, and it is possible to give the player the impression that the expectation for becoming a jackpot indicated by the notice effect changes at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. Thus, the player can be made to operate the frame button 22 while considering the timing of operating the frame button 22.

  In the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the cut-in 155, the player is not notified of the expectation of becoming a big hit if the frame button 22 is not operated during the frame button operation reception period. Therefore, even if the pattern is determined at the stage when the frame button 22 is not operated in the comment display 151 and the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 in which the case of not notifying the expectation that becomes the big hit is determined, the determination may be wasted There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when an operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which pattern to select from among the five patterns is randomly determined, so the player is notified of the expectation of becoming a big hit Only in the decision of the pattern. Thus, unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Now, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variation effect as described above, the pattern of each advance notice effect is not determined in advance collectively in advance, but the time at which the player operates the frame button 22 or If the pattern of each preview effect is determined separately, such as when the preview effect starts, the following problem arises.

  That is, if the pattern of each preliminary rendering is determined separately, an expectation of becoming a jackpot of a high rank in a certain preliminary rendering is indicated, and then a lower rank is set in another preliminary rendering within the same variation production. There is a case where the jackpot expectation is shown. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a preliminary production under change production in order to solve such a problem, in the next preliminary production (following production for subsequent presentation) When determining the pattern of the advance presentation effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a low degree of expectation that is a jackpot of the one rank is not selected. In the pachinko machine 10, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received. Each time the image is displayed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is indicated to the player. However, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, one cut-in image ranks When the expectation of becoming a jackpot is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower expectation of being a jackpot than the one rank is not selected.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  Hereinafter, referring back to FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank in a preliminary announcement effect during variation production is indicated, the next preliminary announcement effect (following announcement effect) In the case of determining the pattern of the preview effect, the specific configuration will be described in which the pattern corresponding to the rank having a low degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank is not selected.

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 has, in the RAM 223, the notice effect counter 223d, the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the frame button operation flag 223g, and the ROM 222 has the determination upper limit pointer 222b. .

  The notice effect counter 223d is a counter for determining one pattern to be performed in the notice effect among the five patterns prepared for the notice effect when the notice effect is performed during the fluctuation effect. . The preview effect counter 223d is periodically updated (in the process of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the present embodiment). The notice effect counter 223d is constituted by a loop counter, and the update thereof is sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value (99) Done by Further, an initial value "0" is set in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed at the time of power on.

  Among the five patterns, the determination of which pattern to perform for the preview effect is, as described above, in the preview effect by the comment display 151, and in the preview effect by the cut-in 155, the player accepted the operation instruction of the frame button 22 At the point of time, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, when the notice effect is started, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the time at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the frame button 22 It is performed at the end of the frame button operation acceptance period for accepting the operation instruction. The advance notice counter 223d is referred to by the MPU 221 at the determination timing of the pattern for performing the advance notice for each notice effect, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that timing and the result of the change effect for which the advance notice is performed The pattern of the advance presentation effect is determined from the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b determined from the variation pattern (normal reach A or super reach A) of the variation effect or the variation effect).

  In addition, since the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is an effect performed automatically, the pattern may be originally determined before the advance notice effect is executed, for example, at the start time of the change effect It seems that it may be possible to decide the pattern of the advance presentation. However, in the present embodiment, when determining the pattern of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the degree of expectation that the jackpot is lower than the pattern selected by the notice effect by the comment display 151 performed before that is lower. It is necessary to deselect the corresponding pattern. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pattern of the notice effect is determined when the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is started after the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed. However, if the pattern of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is determined after the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed and the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is started, the determination timing is arbitrary. It may be

  Here, the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223 d is from “0” to a first predetermined number assigned to the rank with the highest degree of expectation that the jackpot is high, and the second predetermined number from the next value is the jackpot and The degree of expectation is assigned to the second highest rank. Then, the value "99" of the preliminary announcement effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" having the lowest expectation that is a big hit.

  The determination upper limit value pointer 222b is a value of the notice presentation counter 223d for each pattern when selecting one of five patterns prepared for the notice presentation based on the value of the notice presentation counter 223d. It is a pointer which gives the upper limit value of the judgment to.

  When the MPU 221 determines the pattern of the notice effect, the MPU 221 sequentially determines the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the pattern and the notice effect counter 223d at that time, starting from the pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit. Compare with the value. Then, when the value of the preliminary announcement effect counter 223d becomes equal to or less than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern of a certain rank, the pattern of that rank is selected as the pattern of the preliminary announcement effect.

  For example, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is "9" for the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" having the highest expectation for becoming a big win, the upper limit value of the determination of the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" If “9”, the value of the advance notice counter 223 d is 9 or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” is selected as the pattern of the notice effect. On the other hand, when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 10 or more, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" having the highest expectation for the next big win is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d. Do.

  Here, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222 b is “49” with respect to the pattern in which the expectation for becoming a big win corresponds to the rank “4”, the upper limit of the determination of the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” is “ When the value of the advance notice counter 223d is 49 or less as "49", the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect. When the value of the preliminary effect counter 223d is 9 or less, since the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" is already selected as the pattern of the preliminary effect, the value of the preliminary effect counter 223d is actually 10 or more to 49 When it is less, the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  On the other hand, if the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223d is 50 or more, the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot is "3", "2", "1" in the following order, the determination upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to that rank The value of the notice effect counter 223d is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d, and when the value of the notice effect counter 223d becomes equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b given to a certain rank pattern, the rank pattern is Select as a pattern of advance production.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 223d provided for each of the five patterns prepared for each advance notice effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d given to each pattern in any of the notice effects of the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154 and the cut in 155 Is also the same. As a result, in any of the preliminary announcement effects, the degree of expectation of the jackpot indicated by each pattern is the same. As described above, in any of the notice effects, by setting the expectation for the jackpot shown by each pattern to be the same, the rank of the expectation for the jackpot being the same for each notice effect performed during the one variation production is the same. When performed in the pattern, it is possible to impress the player that the expectation for becoming a big hit has not changed in each of the advance notice effects, and also, the one advance notice effect performed during one fluctuation effect is When the rank of the degree of expectation which is a big hit is performed in the upper pattern than the previous notice effect, it is possible to impress the player that the degree of expectation which is a big hit is increased.

  On the other hand, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d given to each pattern, the judgment upper limit pointer 223d is a result (whether a jackpot or a deviation) of the fluctuation effect for which the preview effect is performed and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect It depends on (normal reach A or super reach A).

  When the result of the change effect for which the advance presentation effect is performed is "big hit", regardless of the change pattern of the change effect, in each of the advance effect production, the expected degree to be a big hit is judged with respect to the pattern showing rank "5" "9" is given as the upper limit value pointer 223d, "49" is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern indicating the rank "4" as the expectation that becomes the big hit, the expectation that becomes the big hit is the rank "3" Give "69" as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern shown, give "49" as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern showing the rank "4" with the expectation that the big win will give the expectation that the big win will be “99” is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223 d to the pattern indicating that the rank is “1”.

  When the result of the fluctuation production in which the preview production is performed is "off", and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is "super reach A", the expectation for becoming a jackpot indicates the rank "4" in each preview production. "19" is given to the pattern as the determination upper limit pointer 223d, and "29" is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern indicating the rank "3" for the expectation that the big win is, and the expectation for the big win is “49” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d to the pattern indicating the rank “2”, and “99” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d to the pattern indicating the rank “1” as the degree of expectation for the big win. However, in this case, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d is not given to the pattern whose expectation that is the jackpot indicates the rank "5", and the pattern of the rank "5" is not selected. .

  In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production where the preliminary production is performed is “off”, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “normal reach A”, the expectation for becoming a big hit in each preliminary production is the rank “3” Give "1" as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern shown, give "9" as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern showing the rank "2" as the expectation that the big hit shows the rank "2" “99” is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223 d to the pattern indicating that the rank is “1”. However, in this case, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d is not given to the pattern in which the degree of expectation that becomes the jackpot indicates rank "5" or "4", and the pattern of the rank "5" or "4" Is not selected.

  Thus, by giving the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d to each pattern of the notice effect, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 0 to 9 when the result of the fluctuation effect in which the notice effect is performed is "big hit". If it is in the range, the pattern of rank "5" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 10 to 49, the pattern of rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 69, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 70 to 84, the rank " If the pattern of “2” is selected as the pattern of the notice effect and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 85 to 99, the rank “1” is selected. Turn the monkey selected as the pattern of the announcement attraction.

  In addition, if the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “off”, and the change pattern of the change effect is “super reach A”, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 0 to 19, If the pattern of rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 20 to 29, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect, and the notice effect counter 223d. If the value of is in the range of 30 to 49, the pattern of rank "2" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 99, the pattern of rank "1" is It is selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  In addition, when the result of the change effect for which the advance effect is performed is “off”, and the change pattern of the change effect is “normal reach A”, if the value of the advance effect counter 223d is 0 or 1, the rank “3” If the pattern of "" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 2 to 9, the pattern of rank "2" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is If it is in the range of 10 to 99, the pattern of rank "1" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  As a result, the lower the pattern of rank, the easier it is to be selected when the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “off”, and the higher the pattern is, the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “big hit It is easy to be selected in the case of In particular, with regard to the pattern of rank "5", it is selected only when the result of the fluctuation effect for which the advance presentation effect is performed is "big hit". Thus, the lower the rank of the pattern, the lower the degree of expectation for the jackpot, and the higher the rank of the pattern, the higher the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Then, with regard to the pattern of rank “5”, the expectation of becoming a jackpot is 100%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, by giving the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 223d to each pattern of the notice effect, if the result of the change effect for which the notice effect is performed is "off", the change of the change effect If the pattern is "super reach A", a higher rank pattern, that is, a pattern with a high expectation of becoming a big hit is more likely to be selected as a pattern of the notice effect, and a high expectation of becoming a big hit. The pattern of "4" is selected only when the variation pattern of the variation production is "super reach A".

  As a result, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 performed at the stage of the high speed fluctuation or the normal reach change or the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, when the advance notice effect is performed with the rank "4", the player develops to the super reach. In addition, even if the advance notice is not performed in the rank “4”, if the advance notice is performed in the higher rank pattern, the player can increase the sense of expectation for developing into the super reach. Therefore, not only the expectation to the jackpot but also the expectation to the super reach can be expressed with respect to the notice effect by the comment display 151 performed after the start of the fluctuation effect or the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 as well. The player's interest can also be drawn to the advance notice which is performed toward the beginning after the start of the turn.

  The determination rank counter 223e is a counter used in the process of determining the notice effect in the pattern, and when the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d. In order to give in order from a pattern with a high rank of the degree of expectation, the rank of the pattern which gives the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is counted in order from the high rank.

  The determination rank counter 223e is set to an initial value (S2140) at the start of the notification effect rank determination process (FIG. 36), which is a process of determining the pattern of the notification effect. The initial value is the highest expected rank among the ranks of the degree of expectation that is the jackpot in which the comparison between the judgment upper limit value pointer 222 b and the advance notice counter 223 d is performed in the determination.

  For example, when the result of the change production in which the preview production is performed is "big hit", the comparison between the determination upper limit value pointer 222b and the preview production counter 223d is performed from the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" of the expectation that is the big win. Since this operation is performed, "5" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. When the result of the fluctuation production in which the advance production is performed is “off”, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “super reach A”, the judgment is made from the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” of the expectation that becomes a big hit Since the upper limit value pointer 222b is compared with the preliminary announcement effect counter 223d, "4" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. When the result of the fluctuation production in which the advance production is performed is “off”, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “normal reach A”, the judgment upper limit is determined from the pattern corresponding to the rank “3” of the expectation that is a big hit Since the value pointer 222b is compared with the notice effect counter 223d, "3" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e.

  In the preliminary announcement rendering rank determination process, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (see FIG. 13) is compared with the value of the preliminary announcement rendering counter 223d (S2141 in FIG. 36) S2142). Then, when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is not less than or equal to the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, that is, larger than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by one, and the subtraction is performed again. The value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determined determination rank counter 223e (see FIG. 13) is compared with the value of the advance notice counter 223d.

  On the other hand, when the value of the advance notice counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at that time is determined as the pattern of the notice effect. When the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment rank counter 223e, that is, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the determined pattern, and the type of the notice effect having determined the pattern of the notice effect (comment display 151, A notice effect command including information indicating child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, and cut-in 155) is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, during the fluctuation effect being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the advance effect of the type indicated by the information contained in the advance effect command is of the rank indicated by the information contained in the advance effect command. It can be displayed on the advance notice effect area Db of the third symbol display device 81 by the pattern.

  In addition, after the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the pattern of the notice effect is determined next, that is, until the process of determining the notice effect rank is executed next. Ru. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 performs audio output according to the notice effect of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e, and controls the lamp display.

  Further, as described above, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the pattern of the notice effect is not determined by the notice effect itself, but the pattern determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 performed immediately before and Perform advance notice with the same rank pattern. Here, after the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the pattern of the notice effect is determined next, so when performing the notice effect by the character appearance 154, The value of the judgment rank counter 223 e is maintained at the value of the judgment rank counter 223 e when the pattern of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. Therefore, when performing the announcement effect by the character appearance 154, it is the same as the pattern determined in the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153 only by performing the announcement effect with the pattern of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at that time. An advance notice can be made with a pattern of ranks.

  The second pointer 223 f does not select a lower ranked pattern than the jackpot expectation of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect performed previously in the same variation effect when determining the pattern of the advance effect Is a pointer to

  In the second pointer 223f, "99", which is the maximum value that the advance notice counter 223e can take, is set as an initial value when the variable reach by normal reach A or super reach A is started (S2113 in FIG. 33). ). Then, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined in one variation effect, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the second pointer 223f (FIG. 36). S2144).

  As described above, when determining the pattern of the notice effect, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (see FIG. 13) and the value of the notice effect counter 223d Although the comparison is performed (S2141 and S2142 in FIG. 36), if it is determined that the value of the advance notice counter 223d is larger than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b in the comparison, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is set to 1 Before subtraction (S2147 in FIG. 36), the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at that time is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f (S2145 in FIG. 36). , S2146). As a result, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e at that time (the value of the determination rank counter 223e before 1 is subtracted) The pattern of is determined as the pattern of the notice effect.

  When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the pattern having the same rank as the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is the same as that of the same variation effect in the notice effect performed before It means that it was decided. As in the present embodiment, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the pattern of the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the notice effect. If an expected degree of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain announcement effect during the fluctuation production by configuring, in the next announcement effect (following announcement effect), when the pattern of the announcement effect is determined, A pattern corresponding to a rank with a low degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice effect during a fluctuation effect, the next notice effect is produced. In (prediction effect afterward), when the pattern of the advance effect is determined, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank. Also, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player, however, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a cut-in image Is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank that has a lower expectation than the one rank.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  In addition, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, a rank pattern indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, whereby a certain rank Of the same upper determination value pointer 222b without changing the value of the upper determination value pointer 222b so that a lower ranked pattern than that rank is determined as a pattern of preview effects each time a pattern of is determined. Using the value, the jackpot expectation of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variation effect Remote low rank of the pattern can be a non-select a. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the values of the determination upper limit pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for the types of ranks not selected, the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is suppressed. However, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production can be deselected.

  The frame button operation flag 223g is a flag indicating that the player has received an instruction to operate the frame button 22. When the flag is on, it indicates that the operation of the frame button 22 has been received by the player. To indicate otherwise.

  The frame button operation flag 223g is set to an initial value "off" in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed at the time of power on. Then, in the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A, during the frame button operation reception period provided for each preview effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. Is received, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123 in FIG. 34). The MPU 221 executes a notice effect rank determination process in response to the frame button operation flag 223g being turned on in the notice effect of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, and the notice effect pattern is displayed. It is determined (S2135 in FIG. 35). Further, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to OFF in accordance with the execution of the preliminary presentation effect rank determination process (S2134 in FIG. 35). Thereby, in each notice effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player instructs the frame button 22 to operate, the pattern of the notice effect is determined, and the notice is made according to the determined pattern. It is possible to make a presentation.

  The RAM 223 additionally shows a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 32) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. Also, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2102 in FIG. 33).

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. As described above, in the fluctuation effect by normal reach A or super reach A, the frame button 22 of the frame button 22 received by the player during the frame button operation reception period provided for each preview effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155. When the operation instruction is received, the pattern of the advance presentation effect is determined, and the advance presentation effect is performed according to the determined pattern. In addition, when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 during a period in which the variation effect is not being executed, the voice output device 226 and the lamp are changed so as to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 and is attached to the back of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the ball entry is an important factor in determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and the ball is intentionally prevented from entering the ball entry. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are dedicated program ROMs (for example, a conventional game machine) Instead of providing and storing the ROM 22) described in JP-A-2006-223598, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 187, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory storing the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 is connected to the image controller 237 for image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234. The video data is transferred to the video RAM 235 for normal use and the video RAM for normal use 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the third symbol is displayed without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing the dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the device 81 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the increase in failure rate due to

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Conversion of the data address of (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-223598).

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234 b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 187 a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. And fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, each by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) Are programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and Processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all included. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (FIG. 37 (FIG. 37 (FIG. 37 (FIG. 37)) is performed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2201 in FIG. 37A) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to a) (see S2202).

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. The MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is at least provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variation image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a is from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The third symbol display device 81 is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image at the time of power on. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 37A).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power on, Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 15 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in Fig. 15 (c). The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. If the result is judged as “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 15 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation production, and if it is “displaced”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a fixed period of time after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs drawing of the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. it can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the rear image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235 c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. 16 (b) is for the back stage B corresponding to the "empty stage" and FIG. 17 is for the back plane C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 16, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  In each of the images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “image for scrolling”), the images are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, the rear surface image on the rear surface C displays the third display in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 17B, a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 17C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.17 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.17 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 16A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 17 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIGS. The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So also may be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface C displays the images of FIGS. 17A and 17B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 17 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 17 (b) to 17 (c) and 17 (c) to 17 (a) can be completed from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 17A and 17B are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 17B to 17C and FIGS. Since the image of FIG. 17 (a)-(b) is displayed using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235 for residence, it is stored in the video RAM 236 for normal use without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images in FIGS. 17B to 17C and 17C to 17A can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sequentially as time passes. it can.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 14) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, in the case where the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect, there is no need to read out the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10, as in the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the generation of the vibration error by the error command. Notify 114 Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the slow reading speed NAND flash memory 234a, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, a clock counter. 233 i, at least a stored image determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and main control The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the device 110 is displayed by the additional data table describing the display content to be displayed with the passage of time and the display data table Among the image data used in the first effect, transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the finalized display effect is the third symbol display device in the case where the stop symbol is determined and displayed by receiving a determination command (display determination command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the change effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop design is a design that is out of pattern, an effect that emphasizes the release is performed, and when the stop design is either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, or 2R probability big hit, each jackpot is emphasized A presentation is performed. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

  In addition, the restart effect is centered on the predetermined position when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (rocked). When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the third symbol display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect and the restart effect is stored. In addition, as for the display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Furthermore, if the fluctuation display pattern instructed by the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table, for example, fluctuation A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the stopping symbol of the deviation is instructed from the main control unit 110 when the presentation pattern is a fluctuation presentation pattern for hit. This special variation causes the third symbol to be changed and displayed at high speed until the determination command (the determination command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and the determination command is received In accordance with, a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left row) is decided to indicate the detachment as a stop symbol.

  If the variation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the variation effect, the display control device 114 causes the main controller 110 to There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery that has been made and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table for variation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variable display data table is constant, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, the pointer 233g is incremented by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, next, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. Thus, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the additional data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 It is Here, "add to one effect" means to change the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control unit 110, and, for example, add or delete another image in one effect And the concept of changing the color tone of a part or all of one effect or changing the image displayed in one effect.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding or deleting a new image and displaying the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 Or, the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in the one effect are set. It is.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect to be displayed additionally to the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from the main control device 110 A case will be described in which the display content for displaying the is defined by the additional data table.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the notice effect additionally displayed for the fluctuation effect, and specifically, five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the comment display 151, and Five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 An additional data table corresponding to each of the five patterns prepared for each is stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, for two effects (effect 1 and effect 2) and two characters (character 1 and character 2), respectively. The sprite type (effect type, character type), the display position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the alpha blending information, the color information, and the filter specification information are defined.

  Further, in the additional data table, the contents of the image to be displayed by deleting from the image to be displayed at the time indicated by the address by the display data table in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table Is also prescribed. In this case, at the address of the temporary data table, the type of sprite to be deleted and displayed and information indicating deletion of the sprite are defined.

  On the other hand, if there is no display item to be displayed by addition or deletion at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no additional display item to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined to mean that (address “0001H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. In "00 FDH", "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, a drawing corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table The contents are described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the notice effect command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads out an additional data table corresponding to the type and pattern of the notice effect indicated by the notice effect command from the data table storage area 233b, It stores in the additional data table buffer 233e. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the display content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is selected from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The image contents to be drawn next are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created. If a sprite to be deleted is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, a drawing list is created without including the sprite, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 is defined by the various sprites defined by the address "0097H" of the display data table by the address "0097H" of the additional data table. The sprites of effect 1, effect 2, character 1 and character 2 are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", since the null data is defined at the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is judged that there is no display object to be added, and the address "display data table" The drawing list is generated based on the various sprites defined in “0001H”. Further, in the additional data table, when the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is "End" information, and when the pointer 233g indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 19, it is determined that the display object to be added does not exist even when the pointer 233 g indicates an address after “00 FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction for drawing the image is issued. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233g, and the drawing contents defined in the additional data table are added or deleted. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined in and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (eg, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. 3 In addition to the effect image (for example, the variation effect image) to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, another image (for example, the advance effect image) is displayed, or a specific image is deleted from the effect image to be displayed In the case of displaying the additional data table in the additional data table buffer 233e by expecting the additional data table expected to be displayed by adding or deleting it, the additional image is easily added to the base effect image and displayed Or delete the deleted image from the base image. Thus, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, temporarily displaying an image in which another effect image is defined for each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 10, data tables corresponding to other effect images are used as additional data tables. By separately defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, a data table corresponding to various presentation modes can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily achieve a wide variety of presentation images.

  Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by setting another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting a display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even when it is determined to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Only by setting in the data table buffer 233e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Further, since the additional data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233 e From the table, while updating the pointer 233g for each time, it is possible to easily identify the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer, and from these, it is easy to make one drawing list corresponding to one frame Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally By defining the display content in the additional data table, various effects can be easily displayed from a small number of data tables.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should start at the time indicated by the address Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  For example, in the change effect by the super reach A and the change effect by the normal reach A, each notice effect by the comment display 151, the child character 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155 is performed in the middle of the change effect. Therefore, in the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table defining the display of the fluctuation effect by Super Reach A and the display of the fluctuation effect by Normal Reach A, the display of the notice data of the image data of the image that can be displayed in each preview effect is displayed. Transfer data information of the image data is defined so as to be stored in the image storage area 236a before the start.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 20).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233f of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the display content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is selected from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. From the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is made while specifying the drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later. Is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233g becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 transfers transfer data information specified at the relevant address in the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It adds to the drawing list created based on it, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", since the null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233 f in accordance with setting of the table in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 37A) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2205 in FIG. 37A). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 49 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 38), and the simplified image display flag When 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 38B) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 38B (b) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is executed). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 of FIG. 49A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) in which the contents of the instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The additional data table buffer 233 e is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with the command from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (such as an advance effect effect). By storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 temporarily writes null data, which means that there is no display item to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If there is an effect to judge the presence / absence and to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is added to the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, while adding the pointer 233g one by one, the MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g and the additional data table buffer 233e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. In the additional data table, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the below-mentioned drawing list (see FIG. 21) is described in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 are described for each frame. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is added and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233 f. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Because of this, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data meaning that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 f.

  Then, while adding the pointer 233g one by one, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later (see FIG. 21) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 g is a display data table, an additional data table, and a transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233 d, the additional data table buffer 233 e, and the transfer data table buffer 233 f. It is for designating the address which should acquire the transfer data information of data. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed (S2403 in FIG. 38) In the reference), the pointer update process (see S2711 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 displays the address indicated by the pointer 233 g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e each time the pointer 233 g is updated. The drawing contents specified in the table are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created, and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e, An effect corresponding to the additional data table may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is an area for storing a drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 g and the other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on the contents of (for example, a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball number pattern, a warning image for notifying occurrence of an error, etc.) While creating the drawing list by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and the contents of other images. Is generated according to the type of sprite. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 38) Every time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233i is decremented by one (see S2713 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all the sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, whether or not the stored image discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236 It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 2202 in FIG. 37A) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  The stored image determination flag 233 j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image determination flag 233j and transfers the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3216 in FIG. 50). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3217 in FIG. 50). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 51).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38) is executed (see S3302 of FIG. 51).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 ms). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then, the first ball entrance The start winning process associated with the winning to 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the fluctuation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and the other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This fluctuation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S1201). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S1202: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S 1204, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S 1203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not is greater than 0 (S1204), and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the storage ball storage area 203c is subjected to shift processing (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area 203c toward the execution area, ie, pending first area → execution area, pending second area → The data in each area is shifted in such a way that the first area for holding, the third area for holding, the second area for holding, the second area for holding, and the third area for holding. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, ie, It is determined whether or not a demo is in progress (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine that the interval is under demonstration.

  Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), and the processing is ended. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 28) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration command can be set to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, according to the process of S1206, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is determined. The pattern that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit after the big hit by the value of the counter C2 (the probability change big hit that the maximum round number shifts to high probability state after 15 round hits) or 2R probability variation big hit (high round number is high probability status after 2 round big hits) It is determined whether the symbol to be converted to a probability variation jackpot) or the symbol to be a 15R normal jackpot (the maximum round number is a jackpot to shift to a low probability state after 15 round jackpots).

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what is made to light only for several seconds after the stop of fluctuation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to make the decision, a decision command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This variation start process (S1207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c. As well as performing a "big hit" or a "deletion" lottery (judgment determination), an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a lottery (permission determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, "7, 307, 582" associated with the "low probability state" in the big hit random number table 202a becomes the big hit random number value and the pachinko machine When the ten gaming states are in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, corresponding to the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot Determine.

  Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c, The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the big hit of 15 rounds, or the maximum round number is 2 Display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether 2R probability variation jackpot to shift to high probability state after big hit of round or 15R normal big hit to shift to low probability state after 15 round big hits The lighting state of the LED 37a is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the big hit, the big hit type (15R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) is a stop type in order to stop and display the big hit symbols corresponding to various big hits in the third symbol display device 81 Set as

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), a display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front or back outreach, a reach other than back or forth out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state, time in the middle, or low probability state excluding time in the middle), the stop type set in the process of S1302, the change type counter CS1 It is carried out based on the value of and the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern type determined in the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). Ru.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and if there is a starting winning , Hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation effect being held in the main controller 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). And if there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning on the first ball entry 64, it is not the number of operation holding balls N <4 (S1402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of holding balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the step S1103 is added to the vacant storage area of the storage ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Are stored in the first area (S1404).

  Next, a pending ball count command including the value of the pending ball count N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created pending ball count command is set (S1406), and the start winning process is ended, Return to timer interrupt processing. This holding ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the number of holding balls N included in the number of balls holding command.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout and emission control device 311 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1611. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1712 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, each control device on the sub-side (peripheral control device, etc.) outputs data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S1701). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, the special winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large opening) Opening) A large opening opening and closing process is performed to open or close the opening 65a (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes from S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 29, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1919 is performed (see FIG. 30) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1802). As described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1916 in FIG. 30), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1919. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1919 is being executed can be determined from the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1919 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process shifts to S1804. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1919 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process moves to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure occurs and during the execution of the power-off process of S1919, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power-off process is being executed. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1919 is performed (see S1918 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1919 is performed, the process of S1808 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1919 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810). The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1808 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power has been completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1804 to S1806 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that, when the process of S1808 is reached via the processes of S1804 to S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the processing of S1901 was executed last time (S1901), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 The processing of S1914 is not performed, and the processing proceeds to S1914. When the process of S1901 is performed for the first time, the process proceeds to the process of S1902.

  In the process of S1901, to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed is a process relating to setting of display and sound (that is, setting of effects) in S1902 to S1913, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variation setting process of S1914 and the command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle while there is no Since the process of S1915 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and the process of S1914 is executed in a short cycle to execute the command received by the command determination process. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1915 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1910 described later (S1903), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1904). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1905 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 285 in accordance with the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring process, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored to enhance the rendering effect, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed It is a process set to be performed. The details of the frame button input monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring process is finished, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and an alarm sound is set to be output from the audio output device 226 (S1953) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1954), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 30). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is ended, next, a notice effect processing is executed (S1909). The preliminary rendering process is a process for executing the preliminary rendering during the variation rendering when the variation rendering by the normal reach A or the super reach A is performed. Details of the advance presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the advance presentation processing (S1909) is ended, next, lamp editing processing is executed (S1910), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S1911). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 31) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1911, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1912), and then the counter update process is performed (S1913), and the process shifts to the process of S1914. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1910 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1911 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the counter updating process, the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, updating of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b and updating of the advance presentation counter 223d are performed in the counter updating process. Updating of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, the update of the advance notice counter 223d is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

  In the process of S1914, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variation setting process, which is a process set to transmit, is executed. Details of the variation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation setting process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1915). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1915 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1916). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1918), and the power-off process is executed (S1919). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1920), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1917) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1917: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1917: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1915). This command determination process (S1915) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuation A to E and 2R fluctuation) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main processing. . The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation setting process (see FIG. 33) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. To be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted and the RAM 233 is extracted. (S2005), and returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2006). When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (ie, held by the main control device 110) The number of balls held for variation presentation) is extracted, and this is stored in the number of balls held counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, the processing of S2007 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a can be corrected and adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

  Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding sphere number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008), and the processing returns to the main processing. . Thereby, in the display control device 114, processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls.

  As a result of the process of S2006, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. After that (S2010), it shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as a display demonstration command and a display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This fluctuation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 In order to make it possible, a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from main controller 110, and a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying display control unit 114 of the determined detailed fluctuation pattern is generated. To generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, and to transmit the generated display variation pattern command and the display stop type command to the display control device 114. It is processing to set to. Further, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the display of the variation effect, and a display holding ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated holding ball number. Furthermore, when the determined detailed change pattern is the normal reach A or the super reach A for performing the advance effect, the processing regarding control of the advance effect is also performed.

  In the fluctuation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from main controller 110, the fluctuation setting process is performed. Exit and return to main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32). The fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuation A to E or 2R fluctuation) in the fluctuation effect performed and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed change pattern counter 223b is read out, and the detailed change pattern is obtained based on the value of the detailed change pattern counter 223b, the change pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the detailed change pattern table 222a. Are determined (S2104).

  Although the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main controller 110 by the fluctuation pattern command is defined only for the fluctuation time, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S2104 is 1 One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on.

  For example, if the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation A (a variation time of 30 seconds), one variation pattern is selected from the detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time of 30 seconds. Ru. The normal reach A is a detailed change pattern selected when the change pattern type notified by the change pattern command is a change A (a change time of 30 seconds). Also, if the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is fluctuation B (fluctuation time 60 seconds), one fluctuation pattern is selected from the detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time 60 seconds. Ru. Super reach A is a detailed fluctuation pattern selected when the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds).

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. It sets to transmit to (S2105).

  Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop symbol that matches the stop type, and when displaying the change effect started by the display change pattern command, the display Display the selected stop symbol.

  Then, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball is performed). (S2107) A display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the holding ball number indicated by the value of the holding ball number counter 223a after update is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number pattern according to the number of held balls indicated by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the balls held by counting the number of the held balls number symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is normal reach A or super reach A which performs advance notice effect (S2109), and if it is normal reach A or super reach A which performs advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), the advance effect flag 223c is set to ON (S2110). Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, control is performed so as to perform advance notice during the change effect.

  Then, based on whether the stop type of the fluctuation effect set this time is out or big hit, and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A, the judgment upper limit value pointer 223 g for determining the pattern of the advance effect is a big hit It is set for each rank of expected value (S2111), and the pattern of the notice effect based on whether the stop type of the fluctuation effect set this time is out or jackpot, and whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A. The maximum rank of the expected value that will be determined as the jackpot can be set (S2112).

  Specifically, when the type of the stop is a big hit, regardless of the variation pattern, “9” is set as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d for the pattern whose degree of expectation that becomes a big hit indicates rank “5” as the process of S2111. Given that “49” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d to a pattern whose expectation that is a big hit indicates rank “4”, and a determination upper limit pointer is given to a pattern that indicates that the big hit is rank “3”. Give "69" as 223d, give "49" as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose expectation for the big hit shows rank "4", and give the pattern for which the big win looks at the rank "1" "99" is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223d. Further, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is the jackpot that can be determined as the pattern of the notice effect is set to "5".

  In addition, when the type of stop is out and the fluctuation pattern is super reach A, “19” is set as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d for the pattern whose degree of expectation that becomes the big hit indicates rank “4” as the process of S2111. Given that “29” is given as a determination upper limit pointer 223 d to a pattern whose expectation that is a big hit indicates rank “3”, and a determination upper limit pointer is given to a pattern that indicates that a big hit is rank “2”. "49" is given as 223d, and "99" is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223d to a pattern in which the degree of expectation that becomes the jackpot indicates the rank "1". Further, as the processing of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is the jackpot that can be determined as the pattern of the notice effect is set to "4".

  If the stop type is out and the variation pattern is normal reach A, “1” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223 d to the pattern whose expectation that is a big hit indicates rank “3” as the process of S2111. , 9 is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223 d to the pattern indicating the rank "2" as the expectation to be the big win, and the determination upper limit pointer 223 d to the pattern as the expectation to become the big win indicates the rank "1." Give "99" as. Further, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is a jackpot that can be determined as the pattern of the notice effect is set to "3".

  Then, the second pointer 223 f is set to the initial value “99” (S 2113), and the variation setting process is ended. Based on the settings in these steps S2111 to S2113, the pattern of the notice effect is determined.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, a frame button input monitoring process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring process (S1907). This frame button input monitoring process (S1907) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the player instructs the operation of the frame button 22. Monitor and accept the process.

  In this frame button input monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the change effect is being executed (S2121), and if the change effect is being executed (S2121: Yes), then the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, or It is determined whether or not the frame button operation reception period provided for the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 is in progress (S2122). If the frame button operation acceptance period is in progress (S2122: Yes), the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123), and the frame button input monitoring process is ended. Thereby, in each notice effect, a pattern of the notice effect is determined, and the notice effect is executed based on the determined pattern.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2122, if it is not during the frame button operation acceptance period (S2122: No), the frame button input monitoring process is ended as it is. As a result, even if the frame button operation 22 is operated when the frame button operation acceptance period is not in progress during the fluctuation effect execution, the operation is invalidated.

  If it is determined in the process of S2121 that the variable effect is not being executed (S2121: No), a process according to the gaming state is executed (S2124), and the frame button input monitoring process is ended. In the process of S2124, for example, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the advance notice processing (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the preview effect processing (S1909). This advance presentation effect process (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and performs the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A as described above. When it is, it is the processing for performing notice production during the fluctuation production.

  In this preliminary announcement rendering process, first, it is determined whether or not the preliminary announcement rendering flag 223c is on (S2131). Then, if the advance effect flag 223c is not on but off (S2131: No), this means that the change effect which does not include the advance effect is selected, and the present advance effect process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the preview effect flag 223c is on (S2131: Yes), then, during the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, any frame button operation acceptance period provided for each preview effect It is determined whether there is any (S2132). Then, if the frame button operation acceptance period is in progress (S2132: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button operation flag 223g is on (S2133), and if the frame button operation flag 222g is not on but off (S2133) S2133: No), the preliminary announcement effect processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the frame button operation flag 223g is on (S2133: Yes), this means that the player has received an instruction to operate the frame button 22. Therefore, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to OFF (S2134) After that, the advance notice rank determination process of determining the notice effect pattern is executed (S2135), and further, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice rank determination process and the notice effect pattern are determined A notice effect command including information indicating the type of the notice effect (comment display 151, super reach selection 153, or cut-in 155) is set (S2136), and the notice effect processing is ended. The notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30). The details of the preliminary presentation effect rank determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result, in each of the preview effects of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player instructs the frame button 22 to be operated, the pattern of the preview effect is determined. In response, the image of the notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Specifically, in the notice effect by the comment display 151, the image prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is deleted, and the image shown in FIG. 9A is displayed as the third symbol display device Displayed on 81. At this time, the color of the frame 163 (see FIG. 9A) of the balloon 162 is displayed in accordance with the pattern determined by the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135).

  In addition, in the super reach selection 153, the character information in the balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation reception period is “Determine the destructor !! Press the button!”) Instead, the third symbol display device 81 displays character information “Who is the destroyer?” Which gives the player a sense of anticipation of who the destruction is selected by the operation of the frame button 22.

  As described above, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 itself, the player is not notified of the determined pattern (rank of the expected value to be a big hit), and in the notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed next, The player is notified of the pattern (rank of the expected value to be a jackpot) determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. In this embodiment, similarly to the other preview effects, when the pattern of the preview effect is determined, the preview effect command is displayed including the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preview effect rank determination process. Although transmitted to the control device 114, in the preliminary rendering with the super reach selection 153 for the above reason, when the pattern of the preliminary rendering is determined, the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering rank determination process is It is also possible to transmit, to the display control device 114, a notice effect command merely for notifying that the pattern of the notice effect is determined, without including the information to be shown. The display control device 114 receives the notice effect command for notifying that the pattern of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, whereby the frame button displayed during the frame button operation reception period is displayed. Instead of the character information in the balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation, "Determine the destruction! Press the button!", The player feels an expectation that the destruction selected by the operation of the frame button 22 is The third symbol display device 81 can display the character information "Who is a wrecker?"

  In addition, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the image prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is once erased, and the cut-in image shown in FIG. Display for a second. At this time, the color of the cut-in frame 174 (see FIG. 12) is displayed in accordance with the pattern determined by the advance presentation effect rank determination process (S2135).

  In the process of S2132, if it is determined that it is not in the period for accepting any frame button operation provided for each preview effect of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155 (S2132: No), and then Currently, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 or the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137). As a result, if it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 or the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: Yes), the process of S2135 After the transition to the preliminary production effect rank determination process (S2135) to determine the pattern of the preliminary production effect, information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preliminary production effect rank determination process, and the pattern of the preliminary production effect A notice effect command including information indicating the type of the notice effect determined (any one of the child character appearance 152 and the super reach selection 153) is set (S2136), and the notice effect processing ends. As described above, the notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30).

  As a result, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, when the execution timing of the notice effect comes, the pattern of the notice effect is determined, and an image of the notice effect, specifically, an image shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device. The color of the clothes 164a (see FIG. 9 (b)) of the child 164 is displayed in accordance with the pattern determined by the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135).

  Further, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, when the player does not instruct the frame button 22 during the frame button operation acceptance period, the pattern of the notice effect is determined at the end of the frame button operation acceptance period, Also, at that time, instead of the character information in the balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation of the frame button being displayed, "Determine the destruction! Press the button!"), By the operation of the frame button 22 Character information “Who is a vanity?” Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to give the player a sense of anticipation that the selected vandal is a person.

  Also in this case, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the pattern of the notice effect is simply determined without including the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the notice effect rank determination process. A notice effect command only for notification may be transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the notice effect command for notifying that the pattern of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, whereby the frame button displayed during the frame button operation reception period is displayed. Instead of the character information in the balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation, "Determine the destruction! Press the button!", The player feels an expectation that the destruction selected by the operation of the frame button 22 is The third symbol display device 81 can display the character information "Who is a wrecker?"

  In the process of S2137, when it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the advance presentation effect by the child character appearance 152, nor the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the advance presentation effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: No) Then, it is determined whether it is time to execute an announcement effect by the character appearance 154 or not (S2138). As a result, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the process proceeds to S2136, and the expected value indicated by the pattern of the notice effect determined in the notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153 A preview rendering command including information indicating the rank of the information and information indicating the character appearance 154 as the type of preview rendering is set (S2136), and the preview rendering process is ended. The determination rank counter 223e is held until the pattern of the notice effect is determined next by the notice effect rank determination process, so that the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at the time when the process of S2136 is performed is It becomes the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern of the notice effect determined in the notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153. As described above, the notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30).

  As a result, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, when the execution timing of the notice effect is reached, the rank of the degree of expectation that is a jackpot indicated by the pattern determined by the notice effect by the immediately preceding super reach selection 153 By the pattern of the same rank, it is possible to display the image of the notice effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 11 on the third symbol display device. At this time, the type of the character and the color to be given to the character are displayed in accordance with the pattern determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 immediately before.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2138 that it is not the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138: No), the notice effect process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a preview rendering effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135). The preliminary rendering rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the preliminary rendering process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process of executing the pattern of the preliminary rendering It is.

  In this preliminary presentation effect rank determination process, first, the determination rank counter 223e is set to the maximum rank of the determination rank set in the process of S2112 in the variation setting process (FIG. 33) (S2140). That is, when the result of the change effect in which the advance effect effect is performed is “big hit”, the maximum rank “5” of the determination rank is set. When the result of the change effect for which the advance effect is performed is “off” and the change pattern of the change effect is “super reach A”, the maximum rank “4” of the determination rank is set. If the result of the change effect for which the advance effect is performed is "off" and the change pattern of the change effect is "normal reach A", the maximum rank "3" of the determination rank is set.

  Thereby, in the subsequent processing, when the result of the fluctuation effect in which the advance presentation effect is performed is "big hit", the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notification effect are generated from the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" of the degree of expectation that becomes the large win. If the comparison with counter 223d is performed, and the result of the fluctuation effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “off”, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “super reach A”, the rank of expectation “big hit” From the pattern corresponding to “4”, the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is compared with the notice effect counter 223d, and the result of the change effect for which the notice effect is performed is “off”, and the change pattern of the change effect is “normal reach” In the case of “A”, the judgment upper limit value pointer 222 b and the notice effect counter Comparison with the 223d is performed. Therefore, when the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “off”, the pattern corresponding to at least the rank “5” is not selected, and the result for the change effect for which the advance notice effect is performed is “off”. The pattern corresponding to the rank "4" may not be selected if the variation pattern of the preliminary presentation effect is "normal reach A".

  Next, out of the determination upper limit pointers 222b set in the process of S2111 in the variation setting process (FIG. 33), the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit indicated by The value U is compared with the value A of the announcement effect counter 223d (S2141), and it is determined whether the value A is less than or equal to the value U (S2142).

  As a result, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is less than or equal to the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes) The rank indicated by the counter 223e is determined (S2143). The rank determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the notice effect command, and the display control device 114 displays an image of the notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 in a pattern corresponding to the rank. The player can recognize the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot by looking at the pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the advance presentation rank determination process is ended.

  If the value A of the preliminary announcement counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the judgment rank counter 223e is executed next. The value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by and the value S of the second pointer 223f are compared (S2145), and it is determined whether the value U is equal to the value S (S2146). As a result, when the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is not equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2147), the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S2147) It returns to the process of S2147) and S2141. Thereby, next, about the rank of the degree of anticipation which becomes a jackpot whose rank is one lower, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the value A of the preliminary announcement counter 223d, It is determined whether or not to rank.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2146, when the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e. It means that the pattern of the same rank as the ranked rank has been determined in the previous notice presentation performed in the same variation presentation. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S2143, and the rank of the pattern to be subjected to the notice effect is determined as the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143). Then, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the advance presentation rank determination process is ended.

  As a result, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a preliminary production under a fluctuation production, in the next preliminary production (following preliminary production), the pattern of the preliminary production is determined. A pattern corresponding to a rank with a low degree of expectation that is a jackpot more than a rank of can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice effect during a fluctuation effect, the next notice effect is produced. In (prediction effect afterward), when the pattern of the advance effect is determined, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank. Also, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player, however, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a cut-in image Is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank that has a lower expectation than the one rank.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  In addition, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, a rank pattern indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, whereby a certain rank Of the same upper determination value pointer 222b without changing the value of the upper determination value pointer 222b so that a lower ranked pattern than that rank is determined as a pattern of preview effects each time a pattern of is determined. Using the value, the jackpot expectation of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variation effect Remote low rank of the pattern can be a non-select a. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the values of the determination upper limit pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for the types of ranks not selected, the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is suppressed. However, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production can be deselected.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 315 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are dedicated program ROMs (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) as in the conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided to store data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2212, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2212, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2213). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table and transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 37). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 37A) (S2215), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2201) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37B, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211 executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2212. It may be part of a boot program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process of setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. A process of setting the start address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2211. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2212, the processing of S2213 to S2215 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2213 to S2215 without performing the processes of S2211 and S2212. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Referring back to FIG. 37 (a), the description will be continued. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2203, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2204, next, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 434 is executed to transfer (see S3002 in FIG. 49A).

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 38B) and simplified display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 38B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 If the display variation pattern command has been received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2206, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S 2301), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2402) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the display data table corresponds to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233 f. Further, when the notice effect command is stored, an additional data table for notice effect according to the type and pattern of the notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the change effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect is displayed as the third symbol The drawing of an image can be controlled to be displayed on the display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 The contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically identified. Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2404). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409), the image is constructed. While specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233b is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. Also when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, the back image after the change is sent to the image controller 237 even when the back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the character data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2404), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2407, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shorts hit, front and back outreach, reach before and after outreach) , And the stop type table corresponding to complete removal) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. To display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process of S2404 is performed. Transition to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2502). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of holding balls for display among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is the command for the number of holding balls for display (S2504: Yes), the processing for the number of holding balls command processing Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40 (a), the details of the holding ball number command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing the pending ball number command process. This holding ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display holding ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the holding ball number command processing, first, the new holding ball number command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S 2403) that the processing for the display holding ball number command in the ON state is turned on (S 2601), and then the display holding Holding ball number information included in the ball number command is acquired (S2602). If two or more display ball holding commands for display are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S2602, the ball holding number information is obtained from the display ball holding command stored last. Thereby, the latest holding ball number information can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of holding balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of holding balls obtained in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flag corresponding to the other numbers of holding balls is turned off Then (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, when the new holding ball number command flag is on, the holding ball number pattern for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON by referring to the number determination flag Expand the reserved image data so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display reserved ball number command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2506: Yes), then the confirmation command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the confirmation command process (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), and this process is ended and command determination is performed. Return to processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is performed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Run. In addition, when the setting of the display of the change effect is processed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set in the change effect has elapsed. Execute the display setting process to make it

  Referring back to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S2508) If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (c). FIG. 40C is a flowchart showing demo command processing. The demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the demonstration command process (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2621). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Since the drawing of the image is specified so as not to occur, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b, so null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear the contents (S2622 ).

  Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S2623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to be on, and that the final display effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The finalized display flag shown is set to OFF, and the finalized display flag indicating that the finalized display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S2624, from the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2621 The third graphic display device 81 specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next, by extracting the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the demonstration display data table is measured using the clock counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. If it is judged that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is finished by the clocking of the display setting control clocking counter 233i based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the final display flag set by the following, the effect to be displayed next As a, it controls so that a demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41A, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d (S2631).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time The table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Temporarily, if the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is main control When instructed by the device 110, while the variation design according to the set display data table for variation is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 (display determination command ) And the third symbol in motion is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to display data table buffer 233d is ended, the confirmation command from main controller 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display determination command) is received, the player changes the restart effect. Visualize as part of the effect and watch the third symbol variation in the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is determined You can kick it.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2633).

  After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and others The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern corresponds to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2634. It can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether there is any contradiction between the set fluctuation pattern of the display data table for change and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction As will be described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233i (S2635), The pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the fluctuation pattern command is changed. End, and return to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2631 while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S2636. The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g are extracted from the data, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer is processed by the processing of S263. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set to 233f, and the image data of the sprite required in the set display data table for variation is previously extracted from the character ROM 234 for normal use. Bidet To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the RAM 236, controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233i in which the fluctuation time data is set by the process of S2635, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table If it is determined that the command has been completed, the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the final command (display command for display) from the main control unit 110 is received, and finalized within a predetermined time after the end of the variable performance If the command (display determination command) can not be received, the setting of the display is controlled to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command. Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, since the determination of the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is performed first, the confirmation command process, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for command is executed later, and as in the process of S2637, the finalized command flag set by the finalized command for display can be set to "off" by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed with priority given to the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command.

  Similarly, when both the display demo command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the process corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination processing, since the determination of the presence / absence of the display demo command is performed first, the demo command processing which is processing corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first, while the display The process corresponding to the for-use variation pattern command is executed later, and the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demo command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting as in the process of S2631. Can. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed by giving priority to variation effects associated with the display variation pattern command.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands. (S2512) If there is a display variation type command (S2511: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time junior high hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach completely out) indicated by the display stop type command Determine the type table (S2641), compare the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see Fig. 38 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the display device 81 is finally set (S2642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2643).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642 is described as the. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2643, next, the comparison flag is turned on (S2644), this type-of-stop command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display table set by the fluctuation pattern command setting process described above and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, as described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may also be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2642.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually dismounted, and the player The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be mistaken as a jackpot, and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, and in the case of a large hit, the complete removal stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the process of S2512 (S2512: No), it is then determined whether there is a notice effect command among the unprocessed commands ( S2514), if there is a notice effect command (S2514: Yes), the notice effect command processing is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the step S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 42 (a), the details of the advance presentation effect command process (S2515) will be described. FIG. 42 (a) is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing. This advance notice command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In advance notice command processing, type of notice effect indicated by information included in the notice effect command (comment display 151, child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, cut in 155), and The additional data table for the notice effect corresponding to the pattern (the pattern indicating the rank of the expected value to be a big hit set by the voice lamp control device 113) for executing the notice effect is determined, and the determined additional effect for the notice effect The data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2651). Then, this advance presentation effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Thus, in the display setting process, the variation effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to the additional data table for notice effect stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e by the process of S2651. The display content of the image for the next one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the advance effect is additionally displayed. As a result, since the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the pattern in which the notice effect of the notice effect type designated by the advance effect command is designated on the third symbol display device 81, the player is expected to make a big hit from the pattern of the notice effect. You can indicate the rank of the degree. The image data used in the display of the preview effect is set in advance by the processing of S2632 of the fluctuation pattern command processing when the super reach A or the normal reach A for which the preview effect is performed is designated by the display fluctuation pattern command. The character ROM 234 is previously transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 by the transfer data table corresponding to the super reach A or the normal reach A.

  Referring back to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2514 that there is no advance notice command (S2514: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516) ), If there is a rear surface image change command (S2516: Yes), the rear surface image change command processing is executed (S2517), and the process returns to the processing of S2501.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S2405) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2661). Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2662 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined that the rear image change command is not present in the process of S2516 (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520) If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2521), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2681). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2682). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2682, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2520 that there is no error command (S2520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to S2501.

  In the process of S2501 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), The processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2408) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table determination command, display variation pattern Only the command and the display stop type command are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command is determined command processing (refer to FIG. 40 (b)), fluctuation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 41 (a)), and stop type The command processing (see FIG. 41C) is executed, and other commands are discarded without performing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 41A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2631, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIGS. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2701: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination processing to be executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S2702). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new holding ball count command flag is on (S2703), and if the new holding ball count command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process It is determined that the holding ball number command has been processed, and a holding image setting process is executed (S2704).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46 (a), the details of the hold image setting process will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. This holding image setting process causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the holding ball number design for the holding ball number notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the display holding ball number command. It is a process for expanding image data.

  In the holding image setting process, first, with reference to the number determination flag, the number of holding balls number symbols for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is the holding display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 4) The hold image data to be displayed on the page is expanded (S2751). In task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  In the holding image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new holding ball number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after the holding image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new holding ball number command flag is not on, that is, off (S2703: No), then It is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2706).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2761).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Referring back to FIG. 44, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, off (S2705: No), then the comparison flag It is determined whether or not the switch is on (S2709). Then, if the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

  Here, the details of the comparison processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing comparison processing. This process is changed when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233 d contradicts the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command based on the display variation pattern command. In order to change the effect into a special change effect that changes and displays the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Processing.

  In the comparison process, first, among the data table determination flags, the data table determination flag set in the on state is specified, and from the specified data table determination flag, the variable data stored in the display data table buffer 233b The type of display data table is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set in the on state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variation display data table identified by the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol identified by the process of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern is used for outliers, 15R fixed jackpot, hourly large jackpot sharing, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, ··and so on. Therefore, although the process of S2783 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern for deviation, for example, when the stop design is set to the big hit design, it is determined that these do not match. .

  If it is determined in step S2783 that they match (S2783: YES), the process proceeds to step S2788, and after setting the comparison flag to OFF (S2788), the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the special variation display data table in which the special variation is specified is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table Each content is cleared by writing Null data to the buffer 233 f (S 2784).

  Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” from the left row) is turned on and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols Is set to OFF (S2785), and further, time data corresponding to the special variation production time is set in the clock counter 233i (S2786). In addition, as for special fluctuation production, as mentioned above, until it receives the decision command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed The display time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes) because it is displayed. Therefore, 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 9000 are set in the time counter 233i as time data corresponding to the special variation production time.

  Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  As described above, when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233 d is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display based on the display variation pattern command, special processing is performed. Since the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when the confirmation command (display determination command) transmitted from the main control device 110 through the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the special symbol Can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect, the main control device in the display control device 114 There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery performed at 110 and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Referring back to FIG. 44, after the comparison process (S2710) or in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, ie, off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to S2711. Do.

  In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process is performed based on the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233 d, the additional data table buffer 233 e, and the transfer data table buffer 233 f. This is processing for updating the pointer 233g that designates an address to which transfer data information of target image data is to be acquired.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 g is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that each address is sequentially from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233g is updated by the process of S2791, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information or not (S2792). As a result, if it is the End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2793), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S2794), and it corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the clock counter 233i (S2795), and the process proceeds to the process of S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2793 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither a demonstration display data table nor a restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 233g is selected. The value is decremented by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. Thus, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, the display data table for variation and the finalized display data table are set. , Because the drawing contents of the previous address at which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the last image defined in the display data table being stopped. be able to.

  If it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233g after the update by the process of S2791 is not the end information, as a result of the process of S2792, S2793 to S2795 And skip to step S2797.

  In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the finalized command flag is on (S2797), and if the finalized command flag is not on but is off (S2797: No), the pointer updating process is ended and display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the determination command flag is on (S2797: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so the display data table buffer Set the value of pointer 233g to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the end information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S2798), and set the value of the clock counter to 1 Then, the process returns to the display setting process (S2799). Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing contents defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded, and the start of the definite display effect can be controlled.

  Referring back to FIG. 44, after the pointer update process, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table buffer 233 e are of the address indicated by the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2712 together with the reserved image and warning image expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle. If null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. In addition, when the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with null data, null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233i after subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233i is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the confirmation command (display confirmation command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114 is made according to the end of the effect. Is to be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is on (S2715: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114, so the determination is made first The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively, to clear those contents (S2716). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 233i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the set command flag is set to OFF (S2719), and then the set display flag indicating that the set display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2720), and the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are unchanged as the work RAM 233 Copy to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and return to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is confirmed according to the end of the effect. When the command is received, the drawing content can be set such that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until a predetermined time passes since the start of. In the task processing (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2721, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off in the process of S2715 (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2722 shown in FIG. 45, and it is determined whether the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). ). Then, if the finalized display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the finalized display effect has ended, so the finalized display flag is set to OFF. After that (S2723), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233i (S2725). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2726), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2727), and the V interruption processing is ended.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the finalized display effect ends, automatically, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are both processed by the process of S2716. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2722, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S2722: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2728). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the judgment in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2728, if the demonstration display flag is not on but is off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the fluctuation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation production is set in the display data table buffer 233d to start the restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

  Then, if the restart timer counter does not have the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. Are written to clear their contents (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S2732), and further, the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2733), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, since the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not determined at that time.

  Incidentally, after the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the top of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer update processing. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode in which the third symbol is vibrated (rocked) around the predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed It defines only the drawing contents necessary to make it swing and display at least once. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by making the restart effect the effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table causes the third symbol to rock at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing contents necessary for displaying, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If the display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2716 shown in FIG. 47 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A finalized display data table is set in 233 d. As a result, even when the restart effect is being performed, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of S2631 of FIG. 41 (a) is performed, and the display data is displayed. A variation display data table is set in the table buffer 233 d, and variation effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of S2621 of FIG. 40 (c) is performed, and the display data table is displayed. In the buffer 233 d, a demonstration display data table is set, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 to be originally received is not received even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect. Since the effect is displayed in the case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, a malfunction or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command and the display demo command are received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, when a decision command (display decision command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is over, For a predetermined time, it was defined that one image (one of FIGS. 15 (b) and (c)) of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Also, when the reception of the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be received from the main control device 110 through the audio lamp control device 113 is not recognized after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished. A process of setting a display data table which specifies that the fluctuation effect of the power-on time fluctuation image is restarted as it is is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Also, in the comparison process, the fluctuation pattern instructed by the display fluctuation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if these do not match, the stop symbol is removed as the stop symbol (FIG. c) Set the reference).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 49 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3002) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3001 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3102). In this process of S3102, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3102 (S3102: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Also, as a result of the process of S3101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3103, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 39B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 39B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 39B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S3001: No in FIG. 49A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3201). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202), and if it is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3203) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3202 (S3202: No), the process of S3203 and S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3205), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3205: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3206).

  In the process of S3206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3206 (S3206: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Also, as a result of the process of S3205, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

  In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), the image data to be transferred start exists, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3208), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3207: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3212). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3212: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3213), the back image provided for each back image type The start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is stored among the determination flags, and transfer The start address of the previous (video RAM for normal use 236) is specified (S3214), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to the process of S3216.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3216, it is determined whether the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read out from the storage image determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is If the stored state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3216 (S3216: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3217, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated (S3218), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image determination flag 233 j sets the stored state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image to “on”, and in the sub area of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers data to the image controller 237 according to transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. .

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S3301). That is, in the process of S3301, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are processed simultaneously and in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 38) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of advance notice effects are performed in one fluctuation effect. In each of the advance notice effects, the player is notified of the rank of the expected value to be the jackpot according to the pattern of the advance notice effect. In the first embodiment, it is not determined in advance which pattern is to be used for the advance effect, but for each advance effect. In each of the notice effects, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the notice effect counter 223d and the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b provided for each pattern (the rank indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit) are expected When it is judged that the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to the rank, the pattern corresponding to the rank of the notice is subjected to notice effect Determined as a pattern of

  Here, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) is set in the second pointer 223f every time the pattern of the preliminary announcement effect is determined in one variation effect. . Then, when determining the pattern of the notice effect, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is the judgment upper limit pointer 222b in the comparison between the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) and the value of the notice effect counter 223d. If it is determined that the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b is larger than the value of the second pointer 223f, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the pattern (rank) is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f. As a result, when the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the pattern at that time is determined as the pattern of the notice effect.

  When the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, a pattern of the same rank as that of the rank is determined in the notice effect previously performed among the same variation effects. It means being done. As in the present embodiment, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the pattern of the rank given the determination upper limit pointer 222b is determined as the pattern of the notice effect. When the expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary announcement production during the fluctuation production, the next preliminary announcement production (following preliminary presentation production) indicates that the pattern of the preliminary presentation production is determined. A pattern corresponding to a rank with a low degree of expectation that is a jackpot of one rank can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice effect during a fluctuation effect, the next notice effect is produced. In (prediction effect afterward), when the pattern of the advance effect is determined, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank. Also, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player, however, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a cut-in image Is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank that has a lower expectation than the one rank.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  In addition, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the rank pattern given the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is configured to be determined as the pattern of the notice effect. The same judgment upper limit value without changing the value of judgment upper limit value pointer 222b so that the pattern of the rank lower than the rank is deselected as the advance announcement pattern each time the pattern of the rank is determined. Expected to be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice performed previously in the same variation production using the value of the pointer 222b It can be a non-select a lower rank of pattern than. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the values of the determination upper limit pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for the types of ranks not selected, the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is suppressed. However, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production can be deselected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 53, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the pattern of the notice effect is determined, it is performed before the same variation effect The structure which makes non-selection the pattern of a rank lower than the expectation which will be a jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary announcement production was demonstrated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h notifies When determining the pattern of the notice effect by changing the update range of the effect counter 223d, it is lower than the expectation of becoming the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed previously in the same fluctuation effect The rank pattern is configured to be deselected.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration other than the above and the notification effect rank determination processing (S2135), the counter update processing (S1913) and the command determination processing (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The various processes executed by each control device are the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  The preliminary effect counter maximum value memory 223h is a counter that determines the maximum value that can be taken by the preliminary effect counter 223d, which is a loop counter. The preview effect counter 223d is updated while looping from 0 to a value range indicated by the preview effect counter maximum value memory 223h. That is, although the update of the advance effect counter 223d is performed by the counter update process (S1913) of the main process (FIG. 30), in this counter update process, the advance effect counter 223d is incremented by one each time the counter update process is executed. The addition is performed, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0 when the value of the notice effect counter 223d after the addition becomes larger than the value stored in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. Update.

  Here, since the value of the notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0 when the value of the notice effect counter 223d after the addition becomes larger than the value stored in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the notice effect counter Even when the value of the maximum value memory 223h is set to a smaller value than the preliminary announcement counter 223d, the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223d can be set to 0 at the next update. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance effect counter 223d from becoming a value outside the range defined by the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h.

  In addition, when setting a new value in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, in particular, the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to be newly set is a value smaller than the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time. If it has become, the value of the notice effect counter 223d may be divided by the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to be newly set, and the remainder may be newly set in the notice effect counter 223d. Also by this, it is possible to prevent the advance effect counter 223d from becoming a value out of the range defined by the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h. Further, in this case, the value set in the preliminary announcement effect counter 223d is not fixed to 0, so the randomness of determining the pattern of the preliminary announcement effect can be improved.

  In the preliminary effect counter maximum value memory 223h, an initial value "99" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed at the time of power on. Although not shown, in the command determination process (FIG. 32), when the confirmation command is received from main controller 110, that is, at the stage when the change effect is confirmed and displayed, advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h The initial value "99" is set. Thereby, the advance notice counter 223d is normally updated in the range of "0" to "99". In the command determination process, when a command other than the confirmation command is received from the main control apparatus 110, the same process as that of the first embodiment is performed, and thus the description is omitted here.

  On the other hand, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined in one variation effect in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is the notice effect counter maximum value It is set in the memory 223h (S2151 in FIG. 53). As a result, thereafter, the advance notice counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the advance notice counter 223d from being updated in a range in which a low rank pattern having a high degree of expectation that is a big hit than the determined pattern (rank) is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent announcement effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank having a low degree of expectation that the jackpot is greater than the rank of the pattern once determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135). The preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the preliminary announcement rendering process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing a pattern of the preliminary announcement rendering.

  The processes of S2140 to S2142, S2143, and S2147 in the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S2147. Then, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S2147), and the process returns to the process of S2141. Thereby, next, about the rank of the degree of anticipation which becomes a jackpot whose rank is one lower, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the value A of the preliminary announcement counter 223d, It is determined whether or not to rank.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2142, in the case where the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is less than or equal to the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), similar to the first embodiment. Then, after determining the rank of the pattern to be subjected to the notice effect as the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2143), the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is different from the first embodiment. The value is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h (S2151), and the notice effect rank determination process is ended.

  As a result, thereafter, the advance notice counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the advance notice counter 223d from being updated in a range in which a low rank pattern having a high degree of expectation that is a big hit than the determined pattern (rank) is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent announcement effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank having a low degree of expectation that the jackpot is greater than the rank of the pattern once determined.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the advance effect counter 223d starts from 0 the advance effect counter maximum value memory The loop counter is configured to be updated within the value range of 223h. The notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is normally set to "99", and the notice effect counter 223d is updated in the range of 0 to 99. However, in one fluctuation effect in which the notice effect is performed plural times, the notice effect Every time the pattern of is determined, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h. As a result, thereafter, the update of the notice effect counter 223d is performed with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value, and therefore, the notice effect after that is determined once. A pattern corresponding to a rank with a low degree of expectation that is a jackpot compared to the rank of the pattern can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the preliminary effect counter maximum value memory 223h as described above, when an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank in a preliminary effect during a fluctuation effect is indicated, the following occurs. In the advance notice effect of (the subsequent advance notice effect), when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a low degree of expectation that is a big hit than the one rank can be deselected. Also, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player, however, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a cut-in image Is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank that has a lower expectation than the one rank.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  Also, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, thereby the update range of the notice effect counter 223h Since a pattern corresponding to a rank with a low degree of expectation that is a jackpot greater than the rank of a pattern once determined can be a non-selection range, each time a pattern of a certain rank is determined, Even if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is not changed so that the lower rank pattern is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, the same determination upper limit pointer 222b is used to use the same variation effect. And select a pattern with a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree of the pattern determined in the preview production performed before. It is possible. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the values of the determination upper limit pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for the types of ranks not selected, the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is suppressed. However, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production can be deselected.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the pattern having the same rank as the pattern (rank) selected so far is relatively likely to be selected as the advance presentation effect, but in the second embodiment, the pattern is relatively relative. The pattern of rank higher than the pattern (rank) selected up to that point is likely to be selected as the preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to create more opportunities to give the player the impression of increasing the expectation of becoming a big win over the plurality of advance notices which are performed during the one change presentation.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first or second embodiment described above, when the second pointer 223f or the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the pattern of the notice effect is determined. The description has been given of the configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation for becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production is not selected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a rank judgment table 222 c instead of the judgment upper limit pointer 222 b. The determination rank memory 223i is provided without providing the pointer 223f and the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and when the pattern of the advance effect is determined, it is determined in the advance effect performed before in the same variation effect. It is configured such that a pattern having a rank lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern is not selected.

  In the third embodiment, the configuration other than the above and the control device other than the variation setting process (S1914) and the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are executed. The various processes are the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as the first embodiment or the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  The rank determination table 222c is a table in which five different ranks indicating the jackpot expected value (that is, five patterns prepared for each of the preview effects) are associated with different values of the preview effect counter 223d. When determining the pattern of the notice effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank associated with the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time is extracted from the rank determination table 222c, and the extracted pattern is determined as the pattern of the notice effect. Do. The rank determination table 222c is further divided into five tables.

  Here, the details of the five tables prepared in the rank determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the first rank determination table 222c1. When the first rank determination table 222c1 determines the pattern of the notice effect, the first rank determination table 222c1 determines the pattern of the notice effect at the very beginning after the change effect is started, or in the notice effect up to this point, the jackpot This is a table to be referred to when only the pattern corresponding to “1” is determined.

  In the first rank determination table 222c1, it is determined whether the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is the jackpot or not, and whether the change pattern of the change effect is "Super reach A" Depending on whether it is “A”, different values of the preliminary announcement effect counter 223 d are associated with each rank (pattern). In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production where the announcement production which decides the pattern is done is the result of the “big hit”, the expectation for becoming a big hit is to the rank “1” to “5” regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production. The values of different preliminary announcement counter 223 d are associated with each other, and the result of the fluctuation presentation for which the preliminary announcement production to determine the pattern is performed is “off” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation presentation is “super reach A”. The value of the different notice presentation counter 223d is associated with ranks “1” to “4” where the expectation for becoming a big hit is matched, and the result of the fluctuation presentation in which the notice presentation to determine the pattern is performed is “big hit” And, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A”, the anticipation degree which becomes the jackpot is different from that of the ranks “1” to “3”, and the preliminary announcement effect cow which is different The value of the data 223d is associated with.

  As a result, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined first after the change effect is started, or in the previous notice effect, only the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation for becoming a big hit is "1". If yes, the pattern of the notice effect is selected, including the pattern corresponding to the rank “1”.

  Next, FIG. 55 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the second rank determination table 222c2. The second rank determination table 222c2 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the notice effect, in the case of the previous notice effect, the pattern corresponding to "2" is determined for the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot. Table.

  Also in the second rank determination table 222c2, whether the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is the jackpot or not, and whether the change pattern of the change effect is "Super reach A" Depending on whether or not it is normal reach A, different values of the notice effect counter 223d are associated with each rank (pattern). In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production where the announcement production which decides the pattern is done is the result of the “big hit”, the expectation that becomes the big hit is to the rank “2” to “5” regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production. The values of different preliminary announcement counter 223 d are associated with each other, and the result of the fluctuation presentation for which the preliminary announcement production to determine the pattern is performed is “off” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation presentation is “super reach A”. The expectation of becoming a jackpot is associated with the ranks “2” to “4” and the value of the different announcement presentation counter 223d is correlated, and the result of the fluctuation presentation in which the announcement presentation for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit” And, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A”, the anticipation degree which becomes the jackpot is different from that of the ranks “2” to “3”, and the anticipation effect cow which is different The value of the data 223d is associated with.

  Thus, when the pattern corresponding to "2" is determined for the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in the previous preview effects, the pattern corresponding to the rank "1" having a degree of expectation lower than the rank "2" However, it is supposed that it is deselected as a pattern of advance presentation effects.

  Next, FIG. 56 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the third rank determination table 222c3. The third rank determination table 222c3 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the notice effect, in the case of the previous notice effect, the pattern corresponding to "3" is determined for the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot Table.

  Also in the third rank determination table 222c3, it is determined whether the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is the jackpot or not, and whether the change pattern of the change effect is "Super reach A" Depending on whether or not it is normal reach A, different values of the notice effect counter 223d are associated with each rank (pattern). In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production where the announcement production which decides the pattern is done is the result of the “big hit”, the expectation that becomes the big hit is to the rank “3” to “5” regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production The values of different preliminary announcement counter 223 d are associated with each other, and the result of the fluctuation presentation for which the preliminary announcement production to determine the pattern is performed is “off” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation presentation is “super reach A”. The expectation of becoming a jackpot is associated with the ranks “3” to “4”, and the value of the different announcement presentation counter 223d is correlated, and the result of the fluctuation presentation in which the announcement presentation for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit” And, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A”, the expectation for becoming a big hit is “3” of the notice effect counter 223 d for the rank “3”. The value of all is associated.

  As a result, when the pattern corresponding to "3" is selected as the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in the prior notice effects so far, rank "1", "2" having a lower degree of expectation than rank "3" The pattern corresponding to is made to be deselected as the pattern of the notice effect. In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production where the announcement production which decides the pattern is done is the “big hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “normal reach A”, the pattern of rank “3” is selected once And, in the preliminary announcement effect after that, only the pattern of the rank "3" is selected.

  Next, FIG. 56 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4. The fourth rank determination table 222c4 is referred to when the pattern of the notice effect is determined, and the pattern corresponding to "4" is selected as the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in the preceding notice effect. Table.

  Also in the fourth rank determination table 222c4, depending on whether the result of the change effect for which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit or not (the change pattern is only "Super Reach A") A value is associated with each rank (pattern). In the case where the result of the fluctuation effect is out of the case and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A”, the value of the notice effect counter 223 d is not associated with any rank (pattern) . This is a case where the result of the fluctuation production is out of the way, and when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is "normal reach A", only the patterns up to the rank "3" can be selected as the pattern of the notice production. It is.

  Also, in the fourth rank determination table 222 c 4, when the result of the fluctuation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”, the degree of expectation for the big hit ranks “regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect Different values of the notice effect counter 223d are associated with 4 "to" 5 ", and the result of the change effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is" out of phase "and the change pattern of the change effect is" In the case of "super reach A", all the values of the advance notice counter 223d are associated only with the expectation that the jackpot is the rank "4".

  In this way, when the pattern corresponding to "4" is selected as the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in the previous preview effects, ranks "1" to "3" having a lower degree of expectation than rank "4". The pattern corresponding to is made to be deselected as the pattern of the notice effect. In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production in which the advance production for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “super reach A”, the pattern of rank “4” is once selected. Then, only the pattern of rank "4" is to be selected in the subsequent announcement effect.

  Next, FIG. 56 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the fifth rank determination table 222c5. The fifth rank determination table 222c5 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the notice effect, in the case of the previous notice effect, the pattern corresponding to "5" is determined for the rank of the expectation level to be the jackpot. Table.

  In the fifth rank determination table 222c5, when the result of the fluctuation effect in which the notice effect to determine the pattern is performed is a big win, the notice effect counter 223d is only for the pattern whose degree of expectation to be a big win corresponds to the rank "5". All the values of are associated. As a result, when the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot is determined in the previous preview effects, the ranks "1" to "4" have a lower degree of expectation than the rank "5". The pattern corresponding to is made to be non-selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  In addition, when the result of the fluctuation production is a deviation, even if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is either “normal reach A” or “super reach A”, the value of the advance notice counter 223 d is also in any rank (pattern) It is not associated. This is because when the result of the fluctuation effect is out, only the pattern up to the rank "3" or "4" can be selected as the pattern of the advance effect depending on the fluctuation pattern.

  The determination rank memory 223i is a memory that stores the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect in one variation effect. When determining the pattern of the notice effect, the MPU 221 grasps from the value of the judgment rank memory 223i the rank of the expectation for the jackpot of the pattern determined by the notice effect up to that point, and uses it from the understood rank The rank determination table 222c to be selected is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5.

  For example, when the determination rank memory 223i is "1", the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "2", the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

  As described above, when the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, the pattern of the notice effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank "1" of the degree of expectation that is a big hit. When another rank determination table, ie, the n-th rank determination table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, it corresponds to a rank with low expectation that is a big hit than rank "n". The pattern to be selected is not selected as the pattern of the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation that is a jackpot lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous notice effect being selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  In addition, the determination rank memory 223i is set to "1" as an initial value when the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is started. As a result, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined for the first time after the change effect is started, the pattern of the notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1, so the rank of the degree of expectation for the big hit is lowest The pattern of the notice effect can be determined including the pattern corresponding to “1”.

  In addition, in the determination rank memory 223i, every time the pattern of the notice effect is determined in one variation effect, the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit indicated by the determined pattern is set. In this way, the judgment rank memory 223i can store the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect in the one fluctuation effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the fluctuation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command for display and the display A process set to generate a stop type command and sent to the display control device 114, a process to set a display ball number command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of held balls, and a detailed determination If the variation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A for which a preview effect is performed, processing relating to control of the preview effect is performed.

  In this variation setting process, in the processes of S2101 to S2110 and S2114, the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed. However, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the detailed change pattern determined in S2104 is normal reach A or super reach A for performing the notice effect (S2109: Yes), the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON. After (S2110), in the third embodiment, "1" is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2171), the variation setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined for the first time after that, the pattern of the notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1. The pattern of the notice effect can be determined, including the pattern to be played.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 58, the detail of the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135) performed by MPU221 in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135). The preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the preliminary announcement rendering process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing a pattern of the preliminary announcement rendering.

  In this preliminary effect rendering rank determination process, first, the rank determination table 222c corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank memory 223i is set from the first to fifth rank determination tables 222c1 to c5 (S2181), and the set rank determination table 222c From the above, the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of anticipation to be the jackpot that is associated with the value of the preliminary announcement effect counter 223d is determined as the pattern of the preliminary announcement effect (S2182). Then, the rank of the determined pattern is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2183), and the advance presentation rank determination process is ended.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the determination rank memory 223i is provided, and in the determination rank memory 223i, in one variation effect, the big hit of the pattern determined in the notice effect up to that time Store the rank of the degree of expectation. When determining the pattern of the preliminary presentation effect, the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous preliminary presentation effect is grasped from the value of the judgment rank memory 223i, and the rank judgment to be used from the recognized rank The table 222c is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5. That is, when the determination rank memory 223i is "1", the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "2", the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

  Here, when the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, the pattern of the notice effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank “1” of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot, but the use is When another rank determination table, ie, the n-th rank determination table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be performed, this corresponds to a rank with a lower expectation than the rank "n". The pattern is not selected as the pattern of the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation that is a jackpot lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous notice effect being selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  In addition, in the notice effect of displaying an image showing the degree of expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when an expectation degree lower than the degree of expectation to become the jackpot indicated in the preceding notice effect is indicated, the game The person may think that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is shown when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is met. Even in this case, the player does not operate the frame button 22, which may lower the will to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rank of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined by the previous notice effect is grasped, and the rank judgment table 222c to be used is determined based on the grasped rank to the first rank judgment table 222c1. By selecting from the fifth rank determination table 222c5, the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous notice effect is selected as the pattern of the notice effect Can be prevented. Also, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player, however, among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a cut-in image Is indicated, in the subsequent cut-in image, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank that has a lower expectation than the one rank.

  As a result, after an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production under a variable production, in a subsequent preliminary production thereafter, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or from the one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation to be a big hit is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested because it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming low after the jackpot expectation is indicated high in the plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation production. Can be deterred.

  In addition, since the jackpot expectation level is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notice effects performed in one variation stage, the player expects the jackpot expectation level to increase, That is, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting so-called upswing. Further, with respect to the notice effect that displays an image indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 positively in expectation of the rise. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  Further, in the third embodiment, since it is necessary to prepare a rank determination table according to the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect in one variation effect, the storage capacity of the ROM 222 To consume a large amount of time, but according to the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice production, it is possible to finely set the probability that the pattern with the high degree of expectation is selected it can. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that the pattern with the high degree of expectation is selected so that the player's interest is more interesting, so the pachinko machine 10 that can make the player more enjoyable by the notice effect can be set. It can be designed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment exerts the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, the same change is determined when a certain advance notice pattern is determined. In a plurality of preview effects performed during one of the variation effects, by deselecting the lower ranked pattern than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance effect performed previously in the effect, among the effects. The configuration has been described in which the jackpot expectation is prevented from being lowered after the jackpot expectation is indicated high.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of advance notices indicating the degree of expectation of the big win are performed in one variation effect, the degree of expectation for the big win in a given advance effect becomes a predetermined rank or higher In the case of subsequent preview production only, if the pattern is lower than the expected jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous preview production performed in the same variation production, as a pattern of subsequent preview production And, in a plurality of advance notices performed during one fluctuation production, after an expectation of a predetermined rank or more is indicated as an expectation of becoming a big win, an expectation of becoming a big win is prevented from becoming lower than the predetermined rank It is configured as follows.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the variation setting processing (S1914) and the notification effect rank determination processing (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The various processes executed by the control device are the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first to third embodiments, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a high rank judged flag 223 j is further provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in comparison with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

  The high rank judged flag 223j is a change presentation in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating an expectation to be a big hit are performed, and the expectation degree to be a big win in a certain advance effect is a predetermined rank or higher (rank “4” in the fourth embodiment) Or "5") is a flag indicating that a pattern has been selected. When the high rank judged flag 223 j is on, in the fluctuation effect where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating an expectation to be a big hit are performed, the expectation degree to be a big win in the previous notice effect up to that is a predetermined rank or higher (rank “4” or Indicates that a pattern indicating "5") has been selected. In addition, when the high rank judged flag 223j is off, in the fluctuation production in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit are performed, the degree of expectation to become a big win in the previous notice effect up to that is a predetermined rank or higher (rank 4 Or “5”) is not selected, that is, a pattern having a predetermined rank (one of ranks “1” to “3”) is selected.

  The high rank determination completed flag 223 j is determined on the basis of the detailed variation pattern counter 223 b and the detail variation pattern table 222 a in response to the receipt of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. In this case, the MPU 221 once sets OFF in accordance with the setting of the advance presentation effect flag 223 c in accordance with the determined detailed variation pattern. Specifically, when the determined detailed change pattern is a change pattern in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the high rank determination is made in accordance with the advance effect flag 223c being set to ON. The done flag 223 j is temporarily set to off.

  Then, when the high rank judged flag 223 j is off when selecting a pattern in one notice effect, the pattern of the notice effect takes into consideration the pattern of the notice effect performed so far during the same fluctuation effect Without doing so, one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5". That is, if the pattern of the previous notice effect to be executed during the same fluctuation effect is the pattern corresponding to any of the ranks “1” to “3” with a low degree of expectation of becoming a big win, the rank “ One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to “1” to “5”. Therefore, in this case, it is permitted that the expectation of becoming the jackpot becomes lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation of the predetermined rank or more is indicated as the expectation of the jackpot in the one preliminary announcement effect.

  In the case of selecting a pattern in one advance notice effect, when a pattern corresponding to “4” or “5” is selected as the rank of the degree of expectation serving as a jackpot, the high rank determined flag 223 j is set to on. And when selecting a pattern for the notice effect performed after that, if the high rank judged flag 223 j is turned on, the pattern of the notice effect is the same as in the first to third embodiments. The pattern of the rank lower than the degree of expectation which becomes the jackpot indicated by the pattern determined for the advance notice effect performed before in the variation effect of is selected as the non-selection.

  As a result, if an expectation of a predetermined rank or higher (rank "4" or "5") is indicated as the expectation of becoming a big win in a plurality of advance notices performed during one variation production, then it becomes a big win It is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from becoming lower than the predetermined rank (rank “4”). Therefore, after an expectation with a high expectation to become a big hit is indicated in the notice effect during a certain change effect, the expectation effect lower than the predetermined rank is given by the notice effect performed later in the change effect. It can be prevented from being shown. Therefore, after an expectation with a high expectation to become a big win during a certain variation production is indicated in the preliminary production with a high expectation, a lower expectation than the predetermined rank is indicated by the preliminary production performed later in the variation production. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the fluctuation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 as in the first embodiment, and the variation setting process of the first embodiment The same processing as (see FIG. 33) is executed.

  Specifically, of the variation setting process, the processes of S2101 to S2113 are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, specific description of these processes is omitted. In the variation setting process in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2109 that the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the notice effect (S2109: Yes), After the processing of S2110 to S2113 identical to that of the embodiment is performed, the high rank determined flag 223j is set to off (S4001), and the variation setting processing is ended.

  The processes of S2110 to S2113 and S4001 are performed when normal reach A or super reach A, which is a fluctuation pattern for executing a plurality of advance notice effects, is determined as the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed in this fluctuation setting process. This is a process for initializing parameters for determining the pattern of each preview effect performed in the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization process, by setting the high rank determination completed flag 223 j off, the ranks “1” to “5” are determined when determining the pattern of the notice effect to be executed at least first after the change effect is started. One pattern can be selected from the patterns corresponding to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135). The preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the preliminary announcement rendering process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing a pattern of the preliminary announcement rendering.

  The processes of S2140 to 2147 in the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the preliminary presentation effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the high rank judged flag 223j Is checked (S4101). If the high rank determined flag 223j is on (S4101: Yes), the processing of S2145 to S2147 is executed as in the first embodiment, and the processing returns to S2141 after the processing of S2147.

  In the process of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146 When it is determined in the process of step S that the value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern to be subjected to the preliminary presentation effect to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2143), it is judged whether the high rank judgment completed flag 223j is on (S4102). Then, if the high rank determined flag 223 j is on (S 4102: Yes), the same processing of S 2144 as that of the first embodiment is executed.

  Thereby, when the high rank judged flag 223 j is on, that is, when the pattern corresponding to “4” or “5” is selected as the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in the previous notice effect up to that point, As in the first embodiment, when selecting a pattern in the notice effect in the subsequent notice effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed so far Can be deselected.

  On the other hand, if the high rank determined flag 223j is not on but off in the process of S4101, the process of S2145 and S2146 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2147. Thereby, the value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the notification effect counter 223d for the rank of the degree of anticipation in which the rank is one lower next than that regardless of the rank of the notice effect performed so far A is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is to be the rank of the pattern for which the preliminary rendering is performed. Therefore, while the high rank judged flag 223j is off, that is, the notice effect performed up to that time during the fluctuation effect shows a low rank as the degree of expectation to be a big hit, or the notice effect is performed even once If not, one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks “1” to “5”.

  In the process of S4102, when the high rank judged flag 223j is not on but is off (S4102: No), whether the rank of the notice effect determined in the process of S2143 is "4" or "5" It is determined whether or not it is determined (S4103), and if the determined rank is not "4" or "5" but is "1" to "3" (S4103: No), the preliminary announcement effect rank determination process is ended as it is Do. Since the process of S4104 mentioned later is skipped by this, the high rank judged flag 223j will be maintained with OFF, and the notice production performed next is also corresponded to rank "1"-"5". One of the patterns to be selected is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the rank of the notice effect determined in the process of S2143 is "4" or "5" as a result of the process of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the high rank determined flag 223j is turned on. Is set (S4104). Then, the same processing of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the processing of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f, and the advance presentation rank determination processing is ended. As a result, when a pattern having a rank of "4" or higher ("4" or "5") is selected as the rank of the expectation for becoming a big hit in the preliminary production, the pattern in the preliminary production is selected in the subsequent preliminary production. In this case, a pattern having a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree of the pattern determined in the preview production performed so far may be deselected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the rank of the degree of expectation of becoming a big win as a pattern of one preview effect is at least a predetermined rank (“4” or “ When the pattern corresponding to 5 ′ ′) is selected, when selecting a pattern for the notice effect performed thereafter, the pattern determined for the notice effect performed previously in the same variation effect Let not be selected a pattern of rank lower than the jackpot expectation that is indicated by.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the fact that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the previous notice production was indicated high in the previous notice production, the low expectation degree is shown in the notice production performed at the end of the change production, and If so, the player's discouragement becomes so great that there is a risk of losing the desire to continue the game.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the rank of the degree of expectation that is a big hit as a pattern of one preview effect is at least a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”) When the corresponding pattern is selected, if the pattern is selected for the notice effect to be performed thereafter, the degree of expectation that the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variation effect is Since the lower rank pattern is not selected, the expectation of a predetermined rank or more (rank "4" or "5") is expected as the jackpot expectation in a plurality of advance notices performed during one variation production. If indicated, it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming lower than the predetermined rank (rank "4") after that. Therefore, after an expectation with a high expectation to become a big hit is indicated in the notice effect during a certain change effect, the expectation effect lower than the predetermined rank is given by the notice effect performed later in the change effect. It can be prevented from being shown. Therefore, after an expectation with a high expectation to become a big win during a certain variation production is indicated in the preliminary production with a high expectation, a lower expectation than the predetermined rank is indicated by the preliminary production performed later in the variation production. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, a predetermined rank or more ("4" or "5") is displayed in the notice effect by the comment display 151 performed before the super reach change (see FIG. 8) and the notice effect by the child character appearance 152. When the pattern corresponding to) is selected, it is possible to select only reach species of a predetermined rank or higher (a lightning reach or a Buddha-like reach) as a reach species of super reach variation. That is, in this case, it can be ensured that the reach species of a predetermined rank or more is obtained. In general, the player tends to place the greatest emphasis on the expectation that the reach type of the super reach fluctuation will be the jackpot among the many preliminary announcement effects. That is, the player is greatly pleased by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. Therefore, if a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher ("4" or "5") is selected in the notice effect by the comment display 151 performed before the super reach change and the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the pattern corresponding to the predetermined rank is selected. By guaranteeing to the player that a reach species (lightning reach or Buddha's reach) of a predetermined rank or more appears as a reach species of reach variation, the player has a certain sense of security and starts super reach variation. Can watch over

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment exerts the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. be able to.

  In addition, in the variation production where a plurality of preliminary announcement effects are performed, when a pattern is selected in which the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big win corresponds to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) as a pattern of one preliminary announcement effect, In addition to the fourth embodiment, after that, part or all of the notice effect (for example, the notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 may be not performed. In addition, after the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation that is a big hit as a pattern of one preliminary announcement effect corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) is selected, the frame button 22 is operated. If the frame button 22 is operated for part or all of the preview effect to be played, the preview effect is performed, but an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 may be not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, while super-announcement production with a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot is being performed, for example, while super reach fluctuation is being performed by a reach species with a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot, The player can be concentrated, and the player's jackpot expectation can be further enhanced.

  In addition, it is performed by the frame button 22 being operated after the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation which will be a big hit is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”) as the pattern of one preview effect. If the frame button 22 is operated for part or all of the advance effect, the advance effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the frame When determining the pattern of the notice effect performed when the button 22 is operated, a pattern having a rank lower than the jackpot expectation of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed prior to that is not selected. It is also good.

  As described above, when the preview effect for displaying an image showing the expectation of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22 shows an expectation lower than the expectation for the jackpot indicated in the previous preview production. The player may think that the degree of expectation for becoming a big hit has dropped as a result of operating the frame button 22. On the other hand, when determining the pattern of the notice effect performed when the frame button 22 is operated, the rank lower than the expectation for the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed before that is determined. By making the pattern non-selection, the expectation of jackpot shown in the previous notice production is maintained or increased in the notice production, so the player will increase the expectation of becoming a jackpot. In anticipation of, that is, expecting so-called upswing, the frame button 22 can be operated. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  In addition, in the variation production where a plurality of preliminary announcement effects are performed, when a pattern is selected in which the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big win is a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) as a pattern of one preliminary announcement effect. After that, it is performed by not operating some or all of the notice effects (for example, the notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 or by operating the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is operated for part or all of the advance effect, the advance effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the frame Instead of or in addition to the execution of the advance notice effect by the operation of the button 22, the advance notice effect may be automatically performed with the arrival of a predetermined time. Then, when determining the pattern of the notice effect performed automatically, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed before that may be not selected. . As a result, while super-announcement production with a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot is being performed, for example, while super reach fluctuation is being performed by a reach species with a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot, It is possible to give an expectation that the player may be concentrated and that the automatic announcement may be made by the advance notice effect which may be further increased without decreasing the expectation of becoming a big hit. As a result, the player can further increase the sense of expectation of becoming a big hit, and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, the same change is determined when a certain advance notice pattern is determined. In a plurality of preview effects performed during one of the variation effects, by deselecting the lower ranked pattern than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance effect performed previously in the effect, among the effects. The configuration has been described in which the jackpot expectation is prevented from being lowered after the jackpot expectation is indicated high.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one fluctuation effect, the super reach fluctuation is limited to a pattern of a notice effect for a certain period. By not selecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice production performed in the reach change, the super reach in the notice effect performed during the super reach change It is configured to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming lower than the expectation shown by the reach species of fluctuation.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration other than the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the notice effect process (S1909), and the notice effect The various processes executed by the control devices other than the rank determination process (S2135) are the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first to third embodiments, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a super reach fluctuation flag 223 k is further provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in comparison with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

  The super reach fluctuation flag 223k is started while super reach fluctuation which is a part of the fluctuation effect being started during execution of the fluctuation effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating an expectation of becoming a jackpot are performed, and the super reach fluctuation is performed. It is a flag indicating that it is When the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on during execution of the fluctuation effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation to be a jackpot are performed, the super reach fluctuation that is a part of the fluctuation effect is started, and Indicates that reach change is taking place. In addition, during execution of the fluctuation production where the advance production indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit is performed, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is off, the super reach fluctuation which is a part of the fluctuation production is not started, and Indicates that super reach fluctuation has not occurred.

  The super reach change flag 223k is determined based on the detailed change pattern counter 223b and the detailed change pattern table 222a when the change pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. In this case, the MPU 221 once sets OFF in accordance with the setting of the advance presentation effect flag 223 c in accordance with the determined detailed variation pattern. Specifically, when the determined detailed change pattern is a change pattern in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the super reach change is made in accordance with the advance effect flag 223c being set to ON. The flag 223 k is once set off.

  Then, the super reach change flag 223 k is set to ON at the timing when the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed with the start of the super reach change is performed. In addition, when the super reach variation flag 223k is turned on, the judgment rank counter is the rank of the pattern selected for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, that is, the timing when the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is performed. The value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by 223e is set in the second pointer 223f.

  If the pattern of the first preview effect is selected, if the super reach change flag 223k is off, the pattern of the advance effect is considered without considering the pattern of the previous notice effect executed during the same change effect. , And one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5". That is, the patterns corresponding to ranks “1” to “5” are displayed for the notice effects (comment display 151, child character appearance 152, and super reach selection 153 notice effects) executed until the super reach change is started. One of the patterns will be selected. Therefore, in these notice effects, it is permitted that the jackpot expectation is lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation of the predetermined rank or higher is indicated as the jackpot expectation.

  On the other hand, when selecting a pattern in one advance notice effect, if the super reach change flag 223k is on, when selecting a pattern for the advance notice effect to be performed thereafter, the pattern of the advance notice effect is the first to the first Similar to the third embodiment, a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree indicated by the pattern determined for the notice effect performed previously in the super reach variation including the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 Deselect the pattern.

  As a result, when super reach change is started in a plurality of preliminary announcement effects performed during one change production, the expectation that becomes the jackpot will be at least lower than the expectation indicated by the reach species of the super reach change. It can prevent. Therefore, since the player can show the player's expectation by keeping the expectation shown by the reach species of the super reach change to the minimum, the player can receive the expectation shown by the reach species during the super reach change. Since the low expectation is indicated by the notice effect, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the fluctuation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 as in the first embodiment, and the variation setting process of the first embodiment The same processing as (see FIG. 33) is executed.

  Specifically, of the variation setting process, the processes of S2101 to S2113 are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, specific description of these processes is omitted. In the variation setting process in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S2109 that the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the notice effect (S2109: Yes), After the processing of S2110 to S2113 identical to that of the embodiment is performed, the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is set to OFF (S4201), and the fluctuation setting processing is ended.

  The processes of S2110 to S2113 and S4201 are performed when normal reach A or super reach A, which is a fluctuation pattern for executing a plurality of advance notice effects, is determined as the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed in this fluctuation setting process. This is a process for initializing parameters for determining the pattern of each preview effect performed in the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization process, by setting the super reach change flag 223k to OFF, when determining the pattern of the notice effect from the start of the change effect to the execution of the super reach change, the rank "1" to " One pattern can be selected from the patterns corresponding to 5 ".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the advance notice processing (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this preview effect processing (S1909). This preliminary rendering process (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and as described above, when performing the variation rendering by the normal reach A or the super reach A, the preview rendering during the variation rendering Is a process for executing

  The processes of S2131 to S2138 in the advance presentation effect process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, if it is determined in the process of S2138 that it is currently the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138: Yes), the super reach variation flag 223k is set to ON (S4301), and the determination rank The value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the counter 223e is set to the second pointer 223f (S4302), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2136.

  In the process of S4302, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b set for the second pointer 223f, that is, the determination upper limit pointer corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 The value of 222 b is a value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222 b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the advance presentation by the super reach selection 153.

  Therefore, the super reach change flag 223k is set to ON by the processing of S4301, and the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is set to the second pointer 223f by the processing of S4302. Thus, in the notice effect rank determination process (see FIG. 65), the jackpot indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation is at least for the notice effect (the notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed after the notice effect by the character appearance 154. It is possible to make a non-selection pattern of rank showing an expectation lower than the expectation.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 65, the detail of the advance presentation rank determination process (S2135) performed by MPU221 in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135). The preliminary rendering effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the preliminary announcement rendering process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing a pattern of the preliminary announcement rendering.

  The processes of S2140 to 2147 in the preliminary rendering effect rank determination process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, if the value A of the preliminary presentation effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No) the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on It is determined whether or not (S4401). If the super reach change flag 223k is on (S4401: Yes), the processing of S2145 to S2147 is executed as in the first embodiment, and the processing returns to S2141 after the processing of S2147.

  In the process of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146 When it is determined in the process of step S that the value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern to be subjected to advance notice effect to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2143), it is determined whether the super reach change flag 223k is on (S4402). Then, if the super reach change flag 223k is on (S4402: Yes), the same processing of S2144 as that of the first embodiment is executed.

  Thus, when the super reach change flag 223k is on, that is, when the super reach change is in progress, as in the first embodiment, when selecting a pattern in the advance presentation effect, it is up to that time during the super reach change It is possible to deselect non-selected patterns whose rank is lower than the expected jackpot of the pattern determined for the preview effect performed on. Further, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is set to the second pointer 223f by the process of S4302 of the notice effect process of FIG. Because of the processing of S2145 and S2146, for the notice effect (prediction effect by the cut-in 155) executed during the super reach change, the rank of the reach species determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is more successful A pattern with a low degree of expectation is at least deselected.

  On the other hand, if the super reach change flag 223k is not on but not off in the process of S4401 (S4401: No), the process of S2145 and S2146 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2147. Thereby, the value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the notification effect counter 223d for the rank of the degree of anticipation in which the rank is one lower next than that regardless of the rank of the notice effect performed so far A is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is to be the rank of the pattern for which the preliminary rendering is performed. Therefore, while the super reach change flag 223k is off, that is, the notice effect (the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, and the notice effect by the super reach selection 153) performed before the super reach change is rank "1". One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to “5”.

  When the super reach change flag 223k is not on but off in the process of S4402 (S4402: No), the process of S2144 is skipped, and the advance presentation rank determination process is finished.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, the pattern of the advance effect is limited during super reach change Among the super reach variation, a pattern having a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree of the pattern determined in the preliminary presentation performed previously is not selected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variation effect, each advance notice pattern is separately generated, such as when the player receives an instruction to operate the frame button 22 or starts the advance notice effect. When it is determined that there is a case where an expectation of becoming a high rank jackpot is indicated in one preliminary announcement production, an expectation of becoming a low rank jackpot is shown in another preliminary announcement production in the same variation production. If such a case occurs, the player will be disappointed that he may be aware that the probability of becoming a jackpot may actually be low, even though the expectation for being a jackpot has been raised once. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, the player tends to place the greatest emphasis on the expectation that the reach type of the super reach change will be the jackpot among the many advance notice effects. That is, the player is greatly pleased by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. The player's discouragement becomes large if an expectation level lower than the jackpot expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach change is indicated in the preliminary presentation effect performed during the super reach change.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, the super reach change is performed only during super reach change, as a pattern of certain advance effect. In the preview effect performed during the super reach change, the reach species of the super reach change is selected because the non-selected pattern is ranked lower than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance effect performed in the previous stage. It is possible to prevent the expectation of becoming a big hit from becoming lower than the expectation of. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest by showing an expectation level lower than the jackpot expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach change by the notice effect performed during the super reach change.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the pattern of the notice effect performed during the super reach change, the expectation of becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed before during the super reach change. Since the lower rank pattern is not selected, the expectation shown by the pattern of the advance presentation effect maintains or increases the expectation shown by the previous announcement effect. Therefore, the player watches over the notice effect in anticipation of a high expectation of becoming a big hit, so it is possible to improve the feeling of being a big hit as the fluctuation production progresses. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the notice effect (the notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed during the super reach change, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted any number of times during the frame button operation acceptance period, and the operation instruction is accepted. Each time the cut-in image is displayed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined each time the cut-in image is displayed, and the expectation of the jackpot is indicated to the player. Then, in the notice effect by this cut-in 155, since the pattern of the rank lower than the expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed before is not selected, the player is not And the frame button 22 can be positively operated. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and the game can be played continuously.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment exerts the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. be able to.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, only during the super reach change, as a pattern of the notice effect, the super reach change is performed before the change. It is configured to not select a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed on the other hand, but the reach species of the super reach fluctuation has a predetermined rank or higher (for example, rank Only in the case of reach species showing the degree of expectation of “4” or “5”), it is determined in the notice effect performed previously in the super reach change as the pattern of the notice effect performed during the super reach change It may be configured to deselect a pattern whose rank is lower than the expected level of winning of the selected pattern. Thereby, when it is developed into a super reach by a reach species of a predetermined rank or more, a pattern of a predetermined rank or more is selected by the notice effect at least during the super reach change. Therefore, after the super reach change is performed in the reach species according to at least a predetermined rank or more, and the expectation for becoming a big hit is shown high, it is possible to prevent the expectation for becoming a big win from becoming lower in subsequent notice effects. It is possible to deter people from losing interest.

  The “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and the “variation effect” described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. It corresponds to "dynamic display of identification information".

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, in the notice effect performed before the development of the super reach change such as the comment display 151 and the child character appearance 152, the specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation for becoming a big hit is "4") If a pattern to appear appears, in the subsequent Super Reach selection 153, select a reach type ("Lightning reach" in the above example) corresponding to that particular rank as a reach type for super reach variation, and a notice by character appearance 154 is given In the effect, a pattern may be selected in which a character corresponding to the specific rank (in the above example, "Learning") appears. In addition, if there is a pattern of change effect development from super reach change to special reach change indicating that the jackpot probability is higher, a specific rank (for example, If a pattern corresponding to the jackpot expectation rank "4" appears, select a reach species corresponding to that specific rank as a reach species for the special reach variation, or display it during the special reach variation A character corresponding to a specific rank may be selected as the character. Further, in the notice effect (in the present embodiment, the notice effect by the comment display 151) performed before the normal reach change, a pattern corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation for becoming a big hit is “4”) appeared In the case of the notice effect (the notice effect by the child character appearance 152) performed during the normal reach, the pattern corresponding to the specific rank may be selected. As a result, if the anticipation effect indicates the degree of expectation of a specific rank (rank with high expectation to become a big hit) at an early stage, reach species of super reach fluctuation (or special reach fluctuation) or super reach fluctuation ( Alternatively, it is possible to secure and show at least the expectation of the specific rank in the notice effect (character appearing during the super reach change, during the normal reach change, or during the special reach change) performed for the normal reach change or the special reach change. Further, in this case, during super reach change (or normal reach change or special reach change), a notice effect (for example, a cut-in 155) is given based on an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. It may be configured not to perform the advance presentation effect). In this way, if the anticipation effect indicates an expectation of a specific rank (a rank with a high degree of expectation to be a big hit) at an early stage, super reach fluctuation (or normal reach fluctuation or special reach fluctuation corresponding to that specific rank) ), And while the super reach (or normal reach or special reach) corresponding to the specific rank is being performed, the notice effect performed based on the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is not performed. The player's interest can be concentrated on the super reach change (or the normal reach change or the special reach change) corresponding to the specific rank. Thus, the player can further increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot. In this case, one or more advance notice effects are automatically performed during super reach change (or normal reach change or special reach change), and in such a notice effect, the expectation for becoming a big hit does not fall. Then, the pattern may be determined such that the rank of the jackpot expectation is maintained or increased. As a result, it is possible to show the player the appearance that the expectation of becoming a jackpot is automatically raised during super reach fluctuation (or normal reach fluctuation or special reach fluctuation), thereby further enhancing the player's interest Can.

  In each of the above embodiments, when determining the pattern of the notice effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed previously in the same variation effect is not selected. Although the configuration described above has been described, instead of this, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous preview rendering, for the preview rendering performed after a certain preliminary rendering It is good also as composition which makes it unselect. For example, except for the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the child character appearance 152, the notice effect performed after the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (in the above embodiments, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 and the cut-in 155) In the preview production (when performed multiple times, all the preview productions)), the rank lower than the expectation of becoming the jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed previously in the same variation production The pattern may be deselected. In addition, if there is a pattern of change effect development from super reach change to special reach change indicating that the jackpot probability is further higher, the same in the notice effect performed after the advance notice effect selecting the reach species of the special reach It is good also as composition which makes non-selection the pattern of the rank lower than the degree of expectation which becomes the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed before among the fluctuation production of. In addition, in the notice production performed after the normal reach change, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed previously in the same fluctuation production is not selected. It is good also as composition. Thereby, when developing into super reach (or when developing into special reach or becoming normal reach), at least during the super reach change (or during special reach change or normal reach change) After showing an expectation of becoming a jackpot of one rank in a certain preview production, in a subsequent preview production, a pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank or an expectation of becoming a jackpot than the one rank The pattern corresponding to the high rank is selected. Therefore, the expectation that will be the jackpot after the jackpot expectation is shown high in the preview effect performed during the super reach fluctuation (or during the special reach fluctuation or during the normal reach fluctuation) where the expectation of becoming the jackpot increases. Since it is possible to prevent the degree from becoming low, it is possible to prevent the player from distraction.

  Also, instead of this, when the reach type ("lightning reach") corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation for becoming a big hit is "4") is selected in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. As long as the notice effect to be executed later, ie, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 (if performed multiple times, all the notice effects thereof), it is determined in the notice effect previously performed among the same fluctuation effects. It is good also as composition which makes non-selection the pattern of a rank lower than the degree of expectation which becomes a big hit of the pattern which is made. In addition, in the notice effect for selecting the reach species of the special reach, the notice to be executed later only when the reach species corresponding to the specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation for becoming a jackpot is “4”) is selected. In the effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed previously in the same variation effect may be not selected. In addition, in the first preview production performed during the normal reach, only in the case where the pattern corresponding to the specific rank (for example, the rank of the degree of expectation to be the jackpot is “4”) is selected, in the preview production to be executed later Alternatively, a pattern having a rank lower than the expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary rendering performed previously in the same variation production may be selected as the non-selection. In this way, when reaching a super rank or a special reach with a specific rank reach, or when a notice effect of a specific rank pattern is performed in a normal reach, at least during super reach change or special reach change, or During normal reach change, a pattern of a specific rank or higher is selected by the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of becoming a jackpot from becoming low in the subsequent notice rendering after the super reach fluctuation is performed at least by the reach species by the specific rank and the expectation of becoming a jackpot is indicated high, and the player enjoys It can prevent you from turning away.

  In the first embodiment, the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223 d is from “0” to the first predetermined number, and is assigned to the rank with the highest degree of expectation for the big win, and the second predetermined number from the next value. However, the jackpot expectation is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value “99” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest expectation for the jackpot, and such notice presentation effect When selecting one pattern out of five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, as a pointer giving the upper limit value of the judgment to the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern The determination upper limit value pointer 222b is prepared, and the value of the advance notice counter 223d is determined in order from the highest rank of the expectation value to be the big hit. It is determined whether or not it is b or less, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is the decision upper limit value pointer 222b or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is decided as the pattern of the notice effect, and the decision upper limit value pointer If the value of 222b is set to the second pointer 223f and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, when the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the determined rank matches the second pointer 223f, The pattern corresponding to the rank at that time was determined as the pattern of the notice effect without performing the determination of the lower rank. On the other hand, the value of the first predetermined number from the value "99" of the preliminary announcement counter 223d is assigned to the rank with the highest degree of expectation that is the big win, and the value of the second predetermined number from the next value is the big win The degree of expectation is the second highest rank, and the value “0” of the notice effect counter 223 d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest degree of expectation for the jackpot, and such a notice effect counter 223 d As a pointer which gives the lower limit value of the judgment to the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern when selecting one pattern out of five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value, the judgment lower limit A value pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or greater than the determination lower limit pointer in order from the rank with the highest expected value that will be the big win If the value of the advance effect counter 223d is equal to or higher than the determination lower limit pointer, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance effect, and the value of the determination lower limit pointer is set in the second pointer 223f. If the judgment lower limit value pointer of the judged rank matches the second pointer 223 f when the value of the preliminary announcement effect counter 223 d is smaller than the judgment lower limit pointer, the judgment of the rank lower than that is not performed, and the point The pattern corresponding to the rank may be determined as the pattern of the announcement effect. This also achieves the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223 d is from “0” to the first predetermined number, and is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation for becoming a big hit, and the second predetermined number from the next value However, the jackpot expectation is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value “99” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest expectation for the jackpot, and such notice presentation effect When selecting one pattern out of five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, as a pointer giving the upper limit value of the judgment to the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern The determination upper limit value pointer 222b is prepared, and the value of the advance notice counter 223d is determined in order from the highest rank of the expectation value to be the big hit. It is determined whether or not it is b or less, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is the decision upper limit value pointer 222b or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is decided as the pattern of the notice effect, and the decision upper limit value pointer The case where the value of 222b is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h and thereafter, the notice effect counter 223d is updated in the range from 0 to the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. Instead of this, the value of the first predetermined number from "99" of the value of the preliminary announcement counter 223d is allocated to the rank with the highest expectation for becoming a big hit, and the second predetermined number of values from the next value is The jackpot expectation is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value “0” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest expectation to be the jackpot, and such notice effect counter 223d When one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of, it is judged as a pointer giving the lower limit value of the judgment with respect to the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern A lower limit pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or higher than the determination lower limit pointer in order from the highest ranked expected value to the big hit. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or higher than the determination lower limit pointer, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, and the value of the determination lower limit pointer is stored in the notice effect counter minimum value memory. After setting, the notice effect counter 223d may be updated in the range from the value of the notice effect counter minimum value memory to 99. This also achieves the same effect as that of the second embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, when the second pointer 223f is provided and one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect, the notice effect is displayed in order from the rank with the highest expectation value to be the big hit. If the value of the counter 223d is equal to or less than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, and the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is set in the second pointer 223f. When the value of the effect counter 223d is larger than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, when the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the determined rank matches the second pointer 223f, the determination of the rank lower than that is not performed, but at that time The pattern corresponding to the rank of was determined as the pattern of the notice effect. On the other hand, when the judgment rank memory is provided and one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is sequentially ordered from the rank with the highest expectation value to be the big hit. If the value is equal to or less than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, and the rank at that time is set in the determination rank memory, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is the determination upper limit If the determined rank matches the rank stored in the determination rank memory, if it is larger than the pointer 222b, the determination of the rank lower than that is not performed, and the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is used as the pattern of the notice effect It may be determined as Also, instead of the second pointer 223f and the judgment rank memory, separate flags are provided corresponding to the judgment upper limit pointers 222b corresponding to the respective ranks, and the respective flags are normally set to OFF, for the notice effect. In selecting one pattern from the five prepared patterns, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b in order from the rank with the highest expectation value to be the jackpot to the rank at that time The corresponding pattern is determined as the pattern of the notice effect, and the flag corresponding to the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank is set to ON, and the judgment is made when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b. If the flag corresponding to the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank is on, lower than that Without performing the determination of the link may be determined a pattern corresponding to the rank of that time as a pattern of announcement attraction. Also by these effects, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the big win are performed in one variation effect, only when the degree of expectation for the big win in a certain advance effect becomes a predetermined rank or higher During the one variation production, by not selecting the pattern of the rank lower than the expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous production in the same variation production as the pattern of the preview production, The first embodiment is configured to prevent the jackpot expectation level from becoming lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation level of the predetermined rank or higher is indicated as the jackpot expectation level in the plurality of advance notices to be performed in the first embodiment. When the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the notice effect, the same variation effect is It is applied to expectations low rank pattern than as a jackpot pattern determined in informational display performed before the configuration of the non-selected, not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case where a plurality of advance notices indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one variation effect, only when the degree of expectation for the big win in the advance notice becomes a predetermined rank or higher, A plurality of patterns performed during one variation production by deselecting a lower ranked pattern than the expectation for becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in the preliminary production performed previously in the same variation production, The configuration of the second embodiment, that is, a configuration that prevents the jackpot expectation level from becoming lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation level equal to or greater than the predetermined rank is indicated as the jackpot expectation level in the preliminary announcement effect. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a notice effect counter maximum value memory 223 h instead of the second pointer 223 f, and the notice effect counter maximum value When changing the update range of the notice effect counter 223d by the Mori 223h, when determining the pattern of the notice effect, it is expected that the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed previously in the same variation effect will be made It is also possible to adapt to a configuration in which a lower rank pattern is not selected, or the configuration of the third embodiment, ie, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, determines the upper limit pointer 222b. Instead, a rank determination table 222c is provided, and a determination rank memory 223i is provided in the RAM 223 without providing the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the preliminary effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the pattern of the preliminary effect is determined. If you decide to use the same Of course applicable also to the configuration that is the expectation low rank pattern than as a down jackpot unselected.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, only during the super reach change, as a pattern of some notice effects, before the super reach change. By not selecting a pattern whose rank is lower than the expected level of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed, the expectation shown by reach species of the super reach fluctuation in the preview performance performed during the super reach fluctuation In the configuration of the first embodiment, that is, the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 for the configuration to prevent the reduction in the degree of expectation of becoming a big win If you do, the expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed earlier in the same variation production Was applied to the configuration of the non-selected pattern of rank it has, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed in one change effect, the notice effect performed before in the super reach change is performed as a pattern of a notice effect only during the super reach change. By not selecting a pattern whose rank is lower than the expectation of becoming a jackpot of the pattern determined in, the jackpot and the expectation that the reach species of the super reach fluctuation show in the notice effect performed during the super reach fluctuation In the configuration of the second embodiment, that is, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the notice is provided By changing the update range of the notice effect counter 223d using the effect counter maximum value memory 223h, notice In the case of determining the exit pattern, for a configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree that is a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement rendering performed previously in the same variation rendering is not selected. It is possible to adapt, and the configuration of the third embodiment, ie, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a rank judgment table 222 c instead of the judgment upper limit pointer 222 b, and the RAM 223 judges rank counter In the case where a determination rank memory 223i is provided without the provision of 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the advance effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the pattern of the advance effect is determined, the advance notice previously performed in the same variation effect The pattern whose rank is lower than the jackpot expectation of the pattern determined in the production is not selected Even as a matter of course applicable.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, each of the variable effects is executed in the fluctuation mode including the advance notice effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated and the advance notice effect automatically performed at a predetermined timing. Although the case where the pattern (that is, the rank of the expectation to be the jackpot indicated in the preliminary presentation effect) is separately determined for the preliminary presentation effect has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. When the fluctuation effect is executed in the fluctuation mode in which only the preview effect performed when there is a change mode is executed a plurality of times, or in the fluctuation mode in which only the notice effect automatically executed at a predetermined timing is executed a plurality of times Even when the rendition is performed, the pattern (that is, the rank of the expectation for becoming the jackpot indicated in the previous rendition) is determined separately for each previous rendition. Temoi.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when various notice effects by the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155 are performed during the fluctuation effect, the respective advance effects are performed in advance. The structure which makes non-selection the pattern of the rank lower than the degree of expectation which becomes the jackpot of the pattern determined by the said advance notice production was demonstrated. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated in the step-up notice in which the degree of expectation increases as the appearing image changes (step-up), the step-up change of the image is made. When it is configured to determine whether or not to be determined, as in each of the above embodiments, when stepping up in each step, the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed step is greater than Also, a configuration may be applied which deselects low rank patterns. Further, each time the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the effect of displaying the expectation of becoming a big hit by the number of star symbols, numbers such as percentages, etc. is also displayed in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. In the above, a configuration may be applied in which a pattern having a rank lower than the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed performance is not selected. Thereby, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be exhibited also for the effect of displaying the expectation for becoming a big hit as a number each time the player has instructed the step-up notice or the frame button 22 to be operated. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thereby, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is confirmed, and it is judged whether or not it is not in use, so the judgment can be made easily.

  Further, in this case, when transfer data information which is not null data exists in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 follows the character string data ROM 234 according to the transfer data information. The image data may be read out of the image data, and the process of transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but shares the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to the controller 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, an existing image controller 237 or an internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as a character ROM is used as it is, and a NAND flash memo 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  The above embodiments have described the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memo 234a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a large capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage means, for example, a hard disk etc. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, but by using the display control device 114 as described in each of the above embodiments, an image can be displayed without any problem at the time when display is desired. It can be done.

  In the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR ROM 234 d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the first program storage area 234 d 1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and after MPU reset the system reset in that area A part of the boot program to be executed first may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiments, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is sent to the buffer RAM 234c. After setting, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 634c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be connected directly to the bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 is described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. Video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by DRAMs of one port type (one input / output port) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A port type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , And the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiments, the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to make it resident, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is sent to the resident video RAM 235 It may be transferred. In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In each of the above embodiments, the resident video RAM 235 is described as being held without being overwritten during power on, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control means 101 or the audio lamp control device Based on a command received from 113, when making the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 largely different, etc., the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity. It is also good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored at the time of power failure cancellation. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power on, before starting transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is confirmed. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiments, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memo 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 turns on the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after powering on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a is the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on fluctuation image area Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, reading of image data from the resident video RAM 434 is not performed while transferring image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. The image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. . Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiments, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player when the fluctuation effect is not being executed, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear surface image change command, and the display control device 114 Although the case of changing the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the back surface image change command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the reach type of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the back image or the reach type of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the reach species after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the like. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data table. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data table, the transfer data is stored so that a new back image is stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the table may be defined, and transfer is performed so that a new back image is stored in an area different from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the original back image is stored. Transfer data information of the data table may be defined. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and an output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110, The main controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 44). The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 46 (b)) when it is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back of the game board 13. However, instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is the back of the game board 13. It may be attached to This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. Also, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying of the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident in the error message image area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 313 The display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when it receives an error command from the main controller 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 425, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  Although the said each embodiment demonstrated the case where the drawing content for adding and displaying advance | precedence production | presentation in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in a fluctuation production as an additional data table was defined, it is not necessarily limited to this. In addition, the additional data table is added to one of the effects displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 to draw various effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The drawing content of may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 In addition to defining or in addition to defining such drawing contents, drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all of the one rendering, or display in the one rendering The drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed may be set.

  When defining the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of a part or all in one effect with the additional data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table In correspondence with the address represented by one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information for specifying the color tone after the change in the sprite are displayed. It may be prescribed. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite for which the color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 g in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233 e and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information defined by the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 displays a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and an address indicated by the pointer 233g. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 g Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table is described to be prepared corresponding to each display data table, but in addition to this, a transfer data table for addition, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared You may The additional transfer data table is used in the corresponding additional data table in correspondence with the address defined in the additional data table (or display data table), and the sprite whose transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in each of the above embodiments, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table is displayed. In addition to the corresponding transfer data table, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer data information to the drawing list if transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233 g in the transfer data table for addition set in the transfer data table buffer for addition. You may

  Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. An additional data table can specify drawing of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Prepare a display data table for each element such as “Change start”, “High speed change”, “Advance notice effect”, “Normal reach change”, “Super reach change”, and respond to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation effect, the display data table corresponding to the sheet necessary for the fluctuation effect specified is combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern It may be generated. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, the case has been described where drawing contents and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233g using the common pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame at which the drawing processing is finished (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment). As described above, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Although the case where information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the frame in which the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image every time it receives the drawing list The buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and may be transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 is controlled via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is completed. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233 d In the display data table buffer 233d, the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be set again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In each of the above embodiments, the demonstration effect has been described in the case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with numbers or the main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiments, in the display control means 314, first, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power The main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 314 transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and at power-on after the transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time in which 20 milliseconds are expressed as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data to be transferred in time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is defined at each predetermined time interval. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. The address of the character ROM 234 may be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiments, the stored image determination flag 233 j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiments, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of that sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image determination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 233j is prepared, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is stored. You may Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where only image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 is described. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made to reside in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence reside in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Describes the information related to the type of sprite, and MPU 231 controls image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may be. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the back surface C that is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described. It is also good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed. In this case, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed to an extent that they can not be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, although the case where one first entry port 64 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball is disposed in the game board 13, it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances for which ball entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of holding balls of the main controller 110 subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S1207) The ball holding ball number command is set to transmit the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S1205 in FIG. 23) from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the ball holding ball number command has a variation pattern It may be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2107 in FIG. 33 is omitted. In addition, when transmitting the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 that has been subtracted, the holding ball number command is information that means that it is the number of holding balls after subtraction (that is, the start winning combination) The ball holding ball number command may be generated without including the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning combination, including the information indicating that the ball holding number is not added added along with.

  In the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and the display control unit 114 is instructed to display from the audio lamp control unit 113. The command may be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a notice effect is produced instead of a command such as a notice effect command or an error occurrence command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114. Various flags such as execution flag and error occurrence flag are generated, and display data table, transfer data table, additional data table are set in display data table buffer 233 d, transfer data table buffer 233 f, additional data table buffer 233 e based on the flags Alternatively, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or an instruction to transfer necessary image data may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, and selection means for selecting a first effect mode that is dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means A sub-control having a main control means having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the aspect of the first effect selected by the selecting means according to an instruction from the main control means A game machine, comprising: control means, for giving a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. The control means executes, during execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means, a second effect indicating a degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect a plurality of times Second effect execution means And a selection means for selecting, for each of the second effects, the degree of expectation to be indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect execution means, and the selection means is for the one of the second effects. When selecting the degree of expectation shown in the second effect, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the second effect performed during the same first effect prior to the second effect A gaming machine A1 characterized by deselecting.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, the mode of the first effect which is the dynamic display of the identification information is selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition. It is selected. Then, in the sub control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect execution means as a first effect in the selected mode. When predetermined identification information is revealed in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, in the sub control means, while the first effect by the first effect execution means is being executed, the second effect indicating the degree of expectation that predetermined identification information appears in the first effect is executed as the second effect It is executed a plurality of times by means. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is selected by the selection means for each second effect. And in this selection means, when selecting the degree of expectation shown by the second effect to the second effect of one, it is executed during the same first effect prior to the second effect. The degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the second presentation is not selected. Thereby, after a predetermined expectation is indicated in a certain second effect during one first effect, in the subsequent second effect, the predetermined expectation or the same high expectation is expected. Can indicate the degree. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed in one first effect, it is possible to prevent the expectation degree from being lowered after the expectation degree that the predetermined identification information appears is highly indicated. The present invention has the effect of being able to determine the degree of expectation of winning each second rendering unit executed during one of the first renderings while deterring the player from losing interest.

  The gaming machine A1 includes operation means operated by a player, and the second effect execution means is provided as a third effect for each of one or more second effects among the plurality of second effects. The operation means is executed when the player operates the operation means, and the selection means plays an expectation degree indicated by the third effect with respect to the third effect, the operation means plays a game. Game machine A2 characterized by being selected in response to an operation by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, with regard to the third effect executed by the second effect execution device in response to the operation of the operation device by the player, the player has the operation device operated by the player with respect to the degree of expectation indicated by the third effect. It is selected by the selection means in response to the operation. Even when configured in this manner, after a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated in a certain second effect (including a third effect) during one first effect, the second effect is performed thereafter In the (including the third effect), it is possible to indicate the same expectation as the predetermined expectation or a higher expectation. Thereby, the player can be made to operate the operation means positively while expecting that the degree of expectation for the predetermined identification information to appear is increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine A2, the second effect execution means executes, among the plurality of second effects, fourth effects other than the third effect at predetermined timings, respectively. When the third effect is executed by the second effect execution means before the fourth effect in one of the fourth effects, the selection means is expected for the third effect A game machine A3 characterized by selecting the degree of expectation that the fourth effect shows with respect to the one fourth effect after selecting the degree.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, among the plurality of second effects, the fourth effect other than the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player is executed by the second effect execution means at a predetermined timing. And, in the one of the fourth effects, when the third effect is executed by the second effect execution means before the fourth effect, the degree of expectation is selected for the third effect Later, with respect to the one fourth effect, the selection means indicates the degree of expectation that the fourth effect indicates. Thereby, even if the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player is executed before the fourth effect, the predetermined expectation is the third effect. After being selected, in the subsequent fourth presentation, an expectation that is lower than the predetermined expectation selected in the third presentation can be easily and surely deselected. Therefore, after the predetermined expectation is indicated in the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player during the first effect of one, the predetermined expectation is subsequently given in the fourth effect. There is an effect that it is possible to select and indicate the same degree of expectation or higher degree of expectation easily and reliably.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the fourth effect is executed by the second effect execution means at a predetermined timing, the selection means is the expectation indicated by the fourth effect. A game machine A4 characterized by selecting a degree.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the fourth effect is executed by the second effect execution means at a predetermined timing for one fourth effect, the selection means selects the degree of expectation indicated by the fourth effect. Thereby, even when the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player is executed before the fourth effect, the degree of expectation for the third effect Even if it is not grasped whether or not is selected, after a predetermined degree of expectation is selected in the third effect, it is more easily and surely selected in the third effect in the subsequent fourth effect The degree of expectation lower than the predetermined degree of expectation can be deselected. Therefore, after the predetermined expectation is indicated in the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player during the first effect of one, the predetermined expectation is subsequently given in the fourth effect. There is an effect that it is possible to select and indicate the same degree of expectation or higher degree of expectation more easily and reliably.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the selection means is configured to increase the degree of expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects performed by the second effect execution means in the order in which the second effects are performed. A game machine A5 characterized by being selected for each of the two effects.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects performed by the second effect executing means is selected by the selecting means in the order of execution of the second effects for each of the second effects. Thereby, when selecting the degree of expectation shown by the second effect to the second effect of one, the second performed during the same first effect before the second effect There is an effect that the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the presentation can be easily deselected.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, each of the plurality of second effects indicates an expectation with which the predetermined identification information appears in a plurality of ranks, and the selection means determines the predetermined time The boundary value in the case where the predetermined range in which the counter is updated is divided in correspondence with the rank of the plurality of expectation degrees indicated by the second effect, and the counter updated in each predetermined range for each rank Based on the boundary value specifying means to be specified and the boundary value specified by the boundary value specifying means in association with the rank in order from the rank with the high degree of expectation, the second one of the first based on the value of the counter When it is determined that the predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation that the second effect of one shows by the determination means that determines whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation that the effect indicates, Predetermined rank The rank information storage control means for storing the related information in the rank information storage means, and the boundary value specified by the boundary value specifying means in association with the rank in order from the rank with high expectation by the judgment means; In the process of determining whether the rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect based on the value of the counter, the rank of the judgment target is a predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means A game machine B1 comprising: discontinuation means for aborting the judgment by the judgment means and selecting a predetermined rank as the degree of expectation indicated by one of the second effects.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the selection unit divides the predetermined range in which the counter is updated in association with the counter updated within the predetermined range at predetermined time intervals and the ranks of the plurality of degrees of expectation indicated by the second effect. And boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank. Then, based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation, as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect based on the value of the counter If it is judged by the judging means whether or not to select the rank, and it is judged that the predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect of one, the information on the predetermined rank is the rank It is stored in the rank information storage means by the information storage control means. On the other hand, one second effect is indicated based on the value of the counter and the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation by the judging means. In the process of determining whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation, if the rank to be determined is the predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means, the determination by the determination means is aborted by the discontinuation means, A predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect of one. Thus, when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, a rank lower than the rank is not selected for the second effect to be subsequently executed within the same first effect. It can be done. Further, this non-selection can be realized while using the same boundary value without changing the boundary value used by the determination means. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store many boundary values, the same effect can be obtained when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while suppressing the capacity required to store the boundary values. There is an effect that a rank lower than the rank can be deselected with respect to a second effect to be executed later in the first effect.

  In the gaming machine B1, the rank information storage control means relates to a rank with the lowest degree of expectation at which predetermined identification information appears, triggered by the start of the first effect by the first effect execution means. A game machine B2 storing information in the rank information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, triggered by the start of the first effect by the first effect execution means, the rank information storage means controls the information regarding the rank with the lowest degree of expectation at which the predetermined identification information appears, rank information storage control It is stored by means. Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of expectation selected for the second effect to be executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, each of the plurality of second effects indicates an expectation with which the predetermined identification information appears in a plurality of ranks, and the selection means is a counter and And updating means for updating the counter within a predetermined range for each predetermined time, in association with the ranks of a plurality of expectation degrees indicated by the second effect, in the order of high or low degree of expectation in the rank; Boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value in each rank when the predetermined range to be updated is divided, and in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation, it is defined by the boundary value defining means in association with that rank. A determination means for determining whether or not the rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, and the one second one by the determination means The production is Boundary value storage control means for storing information on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in the boundary value storage means in association with the predetermined rank when it is determined that the predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation And the updating means is a predetermined range excluding a range associated with a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined rank based on the boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by updating the counter within.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection means is associated with the counter, the update means for updating the counter within a predetermined range every predetermined time, and the ranks of the plurality of expectation degrees indicated by the second effect, and the expectation degree in the rank is Boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank when the predetermined range in which the counter is updated is divided in the order of higher or lower. Then, based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation, as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect, based on the value of the counter, If it is judged by the judging means whether or not to select the rank, and it is judged that the predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect, the judgment means is correlated with the predetermined rank Information on the boundary value defined by the boundary value definition means is stored in the boundary value storage means by the boundary value storage control means. Then, based on the boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage means, the counter is within the predetermined range excluding the range associated with the rank having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined rank by the updating means. Updated with Thus, since the update range of the counter is changed, a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while using the same boundary value without changing the boundary value used by the determination means. Every time, in the second performance performed later in the same first performance, a rank lower than the rank can be deselected. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store many boundary values, the same effect can be obtained when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while suppressing the capacity required to store the boundary values. There is an effect that a rank lower than the rank can be deselected with respect to a second effect to be executed later in the first effect.

  In the gaming machine C1, the boundary value storage control means is ranked at the lowest expectation with respect to the appearance of predetermined identification information, triggered by the start of the first effect by the first effect execution means. A game machine C2 storing information associated with the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in the boundary value storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the boundary value storage control means is associated with the lowest expectation in which predetermined identification information appears, and the boundary value is associated. Information on the boundary value defined by the regulation means is stored in the boundary value storage means. Thus, the counter can be updated over the entire predetermined range from the start of the first effect to the selection of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect for at least the first second effect. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to select the degree of expectation to be selected for the second effect to be executed first after the first effect is started, including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the selecting means may include a counter updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, a rank of a plurality of degrees of expectation that the second effect may indicate, and a value of the counter. Determining means for determining the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect from the value of the counter based on the storage means for storing information indicating the relationship, and the information stored in the storage means And storage means for storing information on the rank determined by the step in the rank storage means, the storage means having an expectation higher than a predetermined rank among the ranks of the expectation which the second effect can exhibit The first storage means stores information indicating a relationship with the value of the counter with respect to ranks excluding low ranks, and the determination means includes information on the predetermined rank in the rank storage means. If stored, the first based on the information stored in the storage unit, the gaming machine and determines the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second rendition from the value of one of the counter D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, storage means for storing information indicating the relationship between the counter updated in a predetermined range at every predetermined time, the ranks of the plurality of expectation degrees that the second effect can indicate, and the value of the counter And are provided. Then, based on the information stored in the storage means, the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect is determined by the determination means from the value of the counter. Then, the information regarding the rank determined by the determination means is stored in the rank storage means by the rank storage control means. Here, the storage means stores information indicating the relationship between the value of the counter and the rank excluding the rank having a degree of expectation lower than the predetermined rank among the ranks of the degree of expectation that the second effect can indicate First storing means, and when the information regarding the predetermined rank is stored in the rank storing means, the second one of the values of the counter is calculated based on the information stored in the first storing means. The rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the effect is determined by the determining means. Thereby, when the predetermined rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, in the second effect executed subsequently in the same first effect, the rank lower than the predetermined rank is not determined. There is an effect that it can be selected. Further, by providing the first storage means, it is possible to finely set the probability of being selected for each rank of the expectation degree equal to or higher than the predetermined rank while deselecting the rank having the expectation degree lower than the predetermined rank. effective.

  In the gaming machine D1, the storage means includes second storage means for storing information indicating a relationship with the value of the counter with respect to the rank of all the degrees of expectation that the second effect can indicate, the rank The storage control means uses the rank information storage means the information on the rank with the lowest degree of expectation at which predetermined identification information appears, triggered by the start of the first effect by the first effect execution means. When the information regarding the rank with the lowest degree of expectation is stored in the rank storage means, the determination means determines from the value of the counter based on the information stored in the second storage means. A game machine D2 characterized by determining a rank of an expectation degree indicated by a second effect of one.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the storage means includes second storage means for storing information indicating the relationship with the value of the counter with respect to the ranks of all the degrees of expectation that the second effect can indicate. In addition, the rank information storage means by the rank information storage control means is information regarding the rank with the lowest degree of expectation at which the predetermined identification information appears, triggered by the start of the first effect by the first effect execution means. Is stored in Then, when the information regarding the rank with the lowest degree of expectation is stored in the rank storage means, the expectation degree indicated by one second effect from the value of the counter based on the information stored in the second storage means The rank of is determined by the determining means. Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of expectation selected for the second effect to be executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2, the gaming machine is an operation means operated by a player and an operation accepting means for receiving an operation of the operation means by the player. And the second effect execution unit is configured to receive the operation of the operation unit by the operation reception unit during a predetermined period with respect to at least one of the plurality of second effects. The fifth selection is repeatedly executed as the fifth effect, and the selection means selects the degree of expectation to be shown in the fifth effect for each fifth effect, and the fifth effect corresponds to the fifth effect. When selecting the degree of expectation shown in the effect of 5, setting the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect performed in the predetermined period prior to the fifth effect as the non-selection A game machine E1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, for at least one second effect of the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing means, the fifth for each of the operation accepting means accepting the operation of the operating means during the predetermined period. It is repeatedly executed as an effect. The degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect is selected by the selection means for each of the fifth effects. In addition, when selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect to the fifth effect of one, the expectation indicated by the fifth effect executed during a predetermined period before the fifth effect The degree of expectation lower than the degree is deselected by the selection means. Thereby, when the operation means is operated during the predetermined period and the fifth effect is repeatedly executed, the expectation shown in the fifth effect of one is the fifth effect performed before that There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the expectation degree lower than the indicated expectation degree. Also, this makes it possible to cause the player to expect the degree of expectation shown by the fifth effect to increase, and can be made to operate the operation means repeatedly, thereby making it possible for the player to play the game. It has the effect of being able to improve the willingness to participate.

  Acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, and selection means for selecting a first effect mode that is dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means A sub-control having a main control means having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the aspect of the first effect selected by the selecting means according to an instruction from the main control means A gaming machine, comprising: control means, for giving a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. Operation means operated by the second control means, and the sub control means is operated each time the operation reception means is received by the operation reception means during a predetermined period during which the first effect is being performed by the first effect execution means Second effect execution means for repeatedly executing a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect, and the second effect executed by the second effect execution means Selecting means for selecting the degree of expectation shown by each time the second effect is executed, and the selecting means selects the second degree of expectation indicated by the second effect. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree shown in the second effect performed during the predetermined period before the effect is deselected.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in the main control means, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the aspect of the first effect which is the dynamic display of the identification information is selected by the selection means It is selected. Then, in the sub control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect execution means as a first effect in the selected mode. When predetermined identification information is revealed in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. In addition, in the sub control means, during the predetermined period in which the first effect is being performed by the first effect execution means, each time the operation accepting means accepts the operation of the operation means, the predetermined identification information in the first effect is A second effect indicating the degree of expectation to be expressed is repeatedly executed by the second effect executing means. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is selected by the selection means each time the second effect is executed. And in this selection means, when selecting the degree of expectation shown by the second effect to the second effect of one, the second performed during the predetermined period prior to the second effect The degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the production is not selected. Thereby, after a predetermined expectation is indicated in a certain second effect during one first effect, in the subsequent second effect, the predetermined expectation or the same high expectation is expected. Can indicate the degree. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed in one first effect, it is possible to prevent the expectation degree from being lowered after the expectation degree that the predetermined identification information appears is highly indicated. The present invention has an effect that it is possible to determine the degree of expectation of winning each second rendering unit repeatedly executed during one of the first renderings while deterring the player from losing interest. Also, thereby, it is possible to cause the player to expect the degree of expectation shown by the second effect to be increased, and to repeatedly operate the operation means, so that the player can play the game. It has the effect of being able to improve the willingness to participate.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1 and E2 includes operation means operated by a player, and the first effect is that the predetermined identification information is The second effect is configured to have a first period indicating that it is to be revealed, and the second effect is a sixth effect to be executed according to the first period, and a player's action during the first period. And a seventh effect to be executed when an operation of the operation means is performed, wherein the selection means is a second effect, which is executed before the first period, of the specific rank of the selection means. When the degree of expectation is selected, the specific rank is selected as the degree of expectation to be shown in the sixth effect, and the sub-control means is configured to execute a second execution before the first period. In the presentation, the selection means makes a specific rank If Machido is selected, the gaming machine F1, characterized in that the non-execution of effect of the seventh.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1 and E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the second effect performed before the first period which suggests that predetermined identification information appears in the first effect, when the expectation of the specific rank is selected by the selection means, A specific rank is selected by the selection means as the degree of expectation shown in the sixth effect, which is the second effect executed in accordance with the first period. Further, in this case, even if the player operates the operation means during the first period, the seventh effect to be performed by the operation is not performed. Thereby, when the expectation of the specific rank is indicated by the second effect as the expectation at which the predetermined identification information appears at an early stage before the first period, the identification is made during the first period. The player can be concentrated on the sixth effect indicating the degree of expectation of the rank. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the expectation that the player is given a predetermined game value.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second effect includes an eighth effect that is automatically performed during the first period, and the selection means is a second effect that is performed before the first period. When an expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selection means, a rank having an expectation lower than that of the rank selected in the sixth effect is deselected as the expectation shown in the eighth effect. A game machine F2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the second effect performed before the first period, when the expectation of the specific rank is selected by the selection means, the expectation shown in the eighth effect automatically performed during the first period As the degree, a rank lower in expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is deselected by the selection means. Thereby, in the eighth effect, the appearing expectation of the predetermined identification information is not shown lower than the specific rank, and the expectation is maintained or shown high. Therefore, during the first period, it is possible to show the player how the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information is raised by the eighth effect, thereby further enhancing the player's interest It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2, the selection means is an expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree in one second effect. When the user selects the second stage performed after the one second stage, the second stage shown in the second stage produces the expectation shown by the second stage. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that an expectation degree lower than an expectation degree is not selected.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when an expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree is selected in one second effect, the expectation indicated by the second effect to the second effect executed after the one second effect When the degree is selected, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the one of the second effects is deselected. Thereby, in the second effect performed a plurality of times during the first effect, when an expected degree equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree is indicated as the expected degree at which the predetermined identification information appears, the second performed thereafter It can prevent that the degree of expectation shown by the effect of 2 becomes lower than a predetermined degree of expectation. Therefore, after an expected degree equal to or greater than a predetermined expected degree is indicated in one second effect of the second effects performed a plurality of times during the first effect, the predetermined expectation is obtained in another second effect By indicating the degree of expectation lower than the degree, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3, the first effect indicates that the predetermined identification information appears. In the case of selecting the degree of expectation to be indicated by the second effect with respect to the one second effect to be executed in the first period, A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the second effect executed prior to the second effect during the first period is deselected.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2 and F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. The first effect is configured to have a first period that suggests that predetermined identification information appears, and the first effect is for one second effect performed during the first period. In the case of selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed prior to the second effect during at least the first period is the selection means Unselected by Thereby, when the first period in the first effect is reached, at least in the second period after the predetermined expectation level is indicated in a certain second effect during the first period, in the subsequent second effect The same expectation as the predetermined expectation or a higher expectation can be indicated. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed during the first period that suggests that the predetermined identification information appears, the expectation after the predetermined identification information appears is indicated at a high level. Since it is possible to prevent the degree from becoming low, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation to be hit in each second rendering unit executed during one of the first renderings while deterring the player from turning off the curiosity There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3, the first effect indicates that the predetermined identification information appears. And the second effect is a sixth effect to be executed in accordance with the first period, and an operation of the operation means by the player during the first period. And the seventh effect to be executed in the case where the selection means is selected in the sixth effect when an expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selection means. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a rank having a degree of expectation lower than the rank selected in the sixth effect is deselected as the degree of expectation to be shown.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2 and F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first effect is configured to have a first period that suggests that predetermined identification information appears, and is a second effect that is performed in accordance with the first period. In the effect of 6, when an expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selection means, a seventh effect which is a second effect to be executed when the player operates the operation means during the first period. As the degree of expectation shown in the effect, a rank having a degree of expectation lower than the rank selected in the sixth effect is deselected by the selecting means. Thereby, when the sixth effect indicating the degree of expectation of the specific rank is performed in accordance with the first period, in the seventh effect executed when the operation means is operated by the player, Expectations of a particular rank or higher are indicated. Therefore, during the first period, the degree of expectation shown in the second effect (sixth effect and seventh effect) can be secured to a specific rank at a minimum, and thereafter, the operation means is operated to There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect the expectation to be further increased in the stage 7 effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1 and G2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1, and G2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. H2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1 and G2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine H3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, fluctuation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on the predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbol is predetermined at the predetermined stop position. In the case where there is a hit.
There is also a gaming machine which not only displays the fluctuation effect on the display means, but also executes an effect showing the player's expected degree of winning during the fluctuation effect. In such a gaming machine, there are many cases in which an effect indicating an expected degree of winning to the player is executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect. In this way, even if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is performed, the player is expected to be a hit without being bored by executing the effect indicating the expected degree to the player a plurality of times during the fluctuation effect. It is possible to play the game while enhancing the feeling. (For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-312981)
In the conventional gaming machine, in the case of performing the effect of showing the expectation of winning to the player a plurality of times during the fluctuation effect, the pattern of the effect to be executed a plurality of times is determined collectively at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, there can be considered a method of determining the degree of anticipation to be a hit in each effect unit.
However, in the case of determining the degree of expectation to be a hit in each of the effect units during one variation production, there may be a case where a presentation with a low degree of expectation is performed after the effect showing a high degree of expectation is once performed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the possibility of being hit may actually be low even though the player's expectation of being hit once is increased, and the player is disappointed with the interest in the game. There is a risk of being turned away.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is possible to prevent the curiosity of the game from being distracted, and to achieve an expectation of winning at each of the production units during one variation production. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can determine the

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means)
151 Comment display (third effect)
152 Child Character Appears (4th production)
153 Super reach selection 154 characters appeared (the fourth effect)
155 cut-in (third effect, fifth effect)
222b Judgment upper limit value pointer (boundary value specification means)
222c Rank judgment table (storage means)
222c1 first rank determination table (second storage means)
222c2 to c5 second to fifth rank determination tables (first storage means)
223d advance notice counter (counter)
223f second pointer (rank information storage means)
223h notice effect counter maximum value memory (boundary value storage means)
223i judgment rank memory (rank storage means)
S1207 Variation start process (selection means)
S1404 (Acquisition means)
S1907 Frame button input monitoring process (operation accepting means)
S1909 advance notice processing (second effect execution means)
S1913 Counter update process (update means)
S1914 Variation setting process (first effect execution means)
S2114 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2135 advance notice rank determination process (selection means)
S2142 (determination means)
S2144 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2146 (Meaning means)
S2151 (boundary value storage control means)
S2182 (Measure means)
S2183 (Rank storage control means)

Claims (1)

It has an acquisition means which acquires random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a selection means which selects the type of fluctuation effect which is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The apparatus comprises: main control means; and sub control means having change production execution means for executing the change production based on the type of the change production selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means; In a gaming machine which provides a player with a predetermined gaming value when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
The sub-control means
Suggestion effect executing means for executing a plurality of predetermined suggestion effects for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect while performing one time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect executing means When,
And a selection unit configured to select, for each of the predetermined suggestion effects, an expectation degree type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit.
The predetermined suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears by the difference in display type when the display mode is displayed,
The selection means is
It is possible to select all kinds of the display types for the first predetermined suggestion effect in the variation effect,
A counter updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined update timing;
Defining means for storing boundary values in the case where the predetermined range in which the counter is updated is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed by the predetermined suggestion effect, corresponding to each of the display types;
A determination unit that determines whether to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed based on the boundary value and the value of the counter in the order of the degree of expectation;
An information storage means for storing information on a specific display type when it is determined by the determination means that a specific display type is selected as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed;
The gaming machine is
When it is determined whether or not to select a predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter in the selection of the display type in the predetermined suggested effect to be executed, the predetermined display type; Means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect when the specific display type stored in the information storage means is the same;
An operation means operable by the player;
The suggestion effect of one of the predetermined suggestion effects having a plurality of types of effects different in the display mode is the suggestion effect when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation effect. Executed by the execution means,
A game machine characterized by providing a period in which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means in response to an operation of the operation means after the execution of the one indication effect.

Images